Menu

Acts 24:10 — Word Study

Depth

N1904Ἀπεκρίθη τε Παῦλος, νεύσαντος αὐτῷ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος λέγειν· ἐκ πολλῶν ἐτῶν ὄντα σε κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ ἐπιστάμενος εὐθύμως τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι·

BSAAnsweredapokrinō thende <the>ho Paul,Paulos when was signallingneuō [signaled, beckoned] to himautos [the apostle, originally named Saul] theho governorhēgemōn [ruler, high-ranking official] to speak:legō Forek manypolus yearsetos [a long period of time] as beingeimi yousu [as a judge, with authority] judgekritēs [one who makes fair decisions, an umpire] <the>ho to nationethnos [the Jewish people, a specific ethnic group] thisohutos knowing [these]epistamai [being aware, having understanding] encouragingeuthumos things,ho concerningperi myselfemautou I present a defense;apologeomai [with confidence, cheerfully, give an account of myself, apologize]

Word
Listen & take awayActs 24
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 10 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (apologeomai) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Acts 24:10quick helps
In a sentencePaul responds to the governor, acknowledging his long-standing role as a judge over the nation.
Who is speakingPaul, the apostle, addressing the governor.
Where we areIn a legal setting, as Paul defends himself before the governor.
The hard wordἀπολογοῦμαι
Take awayPaul is confident and ready to present his defense.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subject verbἀποκρίνομαι The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Acts 24:10

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Paul's Defense Before Felixgenerated

9The Jews concurred, asserting that these charges were true.
10When the governor motioned for Paul to speak, he began his response: “Knowing that you have been a judge over this nation for many years, I gladly make my defense.
11You can verify for yourself that no more than twelve days ago I went up to Jerusalem to worship.
12Yet my accusers did not find me debating with anyone in the temple or riling up a crowd in the synagogues or in the city.

Acts 24:10 describes a moment in which Paul is called to speak before the governor Felix. Paul acknowledges Felix's experience as a judge over the Jewish nation and expresses his readiness to defend himself. This setting is part of a series of legal encounters that Paul faces as he defends his ministry and the gospel message, similar to how he later defends himself before King Agrippa in Acts 26:1.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Acts 12:17Peter motioned with his hand for silence, and he described how the Lord had brought him out of the prison. “Send word to James and to the brothers,” he said, and he left for another place.
2Acts 13:16Paul stood up, motioned with his hand, and began to speak: “Men of Israel and you Gentiles who fear God, listen to me!
3Acts 19:33The Jews in the crowd pushed Alexander forward to explain himself, and he motioned for silence so he could make his defense to the people.
4Acts 21:40Having received permission, Paul stood on the steps and motioned to the crowd. A great hush came over the crowd, and he addressed them in Hebrew:
5Acts 26:1Agrippa said to Paul, “You have permission to speak for yourself.” Then Paul stretched out his hand and began his defense:

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 10 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word ἀπολογοῦμαι, apologeomaigenerated

The verb ἀπολογοῦμαι (apologeomai) is a present indicative form meaning 'to defend oneself' or 'to make a defense.' It is built from the prefix ἀπό (from) and the root λόγος (word), conveying the idea of speaking in one's own defense, particularly in legal contexts.

This term is used in various New Testament passages, such as Luke 21:14 and Acts 26:1, where individuals articulate their reasons or justifications. The emphasis is on the act of responding and defending one's position.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

This study reads the verse in the Berean Standard Bible, which uses the phrase make my defense. Other translations like the KJV and ASV use answer for myself, emphasizing the personal nature of Paul's response.

Where translations differ is in the rendering of ἐπιστάμενος. The BSB uses knowing, while the KJV and others use know, which shifts the focus slightly from a continuous awareness to a more general understanding.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the sentence is Ἀπεκρίθη, he answered, which governs the entire response. It is followed by a participial phrase ἐπιστάμενος describing Paul's state of knowledge as he speaks.

The structure includes a noun phrase Παῦλος as the subject, and several clauses that elaborate on his defense, including a prepositional phrase περὶ τὰ that specifies the subject of his defense.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

The Greek word κριτὴν (kritēs) translates to 'judge' and corresponds to the Hebrew word שָׁפַט (shafat), meaning to judge or govern. This connection emphasizes the role of judges in both the Old and New Testaments.

The term ἡγεμόνος (hēgemōn) also appears in the Septuagint, where it is used to denote rulers, highlighting the continuity of authority figures from the Old Testament to the New Testament.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Acts 24:10 recounts how Paul responds to the governor Felix, acknowledging his long experience as a judge over the Jewish people. Paul expresses his readiness to present a defense, indicating his confidence in addressing the accusations against him.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Why does Paul acknowledge the governor's experience?

Paul acknowledges Felix's long experience as a judge to establish respect and credibility in his defense, recognizing the authority of the governor in the legal proceedings.

What does it mean to 'make a defense'?

To 'make a defense' means to explain or justify one's actions or beliefs in response to accusations, often in a legal context.

What is the significance of Paul being in a legal setting?

The legal setting highlights the challenges Paul faced as he spread the gospel, showing that he had to defend his faith not only spiritually but also in the eyes of the law.

How does Paul's response reflect his character?

Paul's confident and respectful response reflects his character as a determined and articulate advocate for his faith, willing to engage with authority figures.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How can I prepare myself to defend my beliefs when challenged?
  2. What does it mean to show respect for authority while standing firm in my convictions?
  3. In what ways can I express my confidence in sharing my faith with others?
  4. How can I learn from Paul's example in addressing difficult situations?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early Church Fathers reference this verse to discuss Paul's defense and the nature of authority in legal matters.

John ChrysostomHomily on Acts 50 c. 347–407
Then Paul; after that the governor had beckoned unto him to speak, answered, Forasmuch as I know that thou hast been of many years a just judge unto this nation, I do the more cheerfully answer for myself.
Early Church Fathers on Acts 24 →
CassiodorusComplexiones on the Acts of the Apostles c. 485–585
"Then Paul answered (the governor making a sign to him), saying." When the orator Tertullus had made the claims he wanted, Paul, after first saying things that might win him the goodwill of the judge,
Early Church Fathers on Acts 24 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Acts 24:10 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Then Paul, after the governor had beckoned unto him to speak,.... Tertullus having finished his account, Paul was silent to his charge and calumnies, until the governor beckoned with his hand or

Read John Gill on Acts 24 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Then Paul, after that the governor had beckoned unto him to speak, answered, Forasmuch as I know that thou hast been of many years a judge unto this nation, I do the more cheerfully answer for

Read Robert Jamieson on Acts 24 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Beckoned unto him, by some sign with his hand. Though St. Paul would not flatter Felix with notorious untruths, as Tertullus had done, yet he speaks very respectfully, and mentions his continuance in the government; the rather, because, if he had been so seditious a person as Tertullus would have represented him to have been, Felix could not but have heard of him, and of any mischief that had been done by him.

Read Matthew Poole on Acts 24 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

10 Then Paul, after that the governor had beckoned unto him to speak, answered, Forasmuch as I know that thou hast been of many years a judge unto this nation, I do the more cheerfully answer for myself: Ver. 10. Forasmuch as I know, &c.] Paul was a stately orator when he listed, as here. Porphyry said it was a pity that such a man as Paul should be bestowed upon our religion. How bravely doth he here unstarch the orator’ s speech, and make his own defence.

Read John Trapp on Acts 24 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(10) Forasmuch as I know . . .—We note at once the difference between St. Paul’s frank manliness and the servile flattery of the advocate. He is content to appeal to the experience of the “many years” (really about six, but this was more than the average duration of a procuratorship, and the words might, therefore, be used without exaggeration) during which he had held office. Such a man was not likely to attach too much weight to the statements of Tertullus and Ananias. Felix, after having ruled for a short time with a divided authority (see Note on Acts 24:2), had superseded Cumanus in A.D. 52 or 53. I do the more cheerfully answer for myself.—The verb for “answer” is connected with our…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Acts 24 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 10. Then Paul - answered] The apostle's defence consists of two parts: - 1. The exordium, which has for its object the praise of his judge, whose qualifications to discern and decide on a question of this nature he fully allows; and expects, from this circumstance, to have a favourable hearing. 2. The tractation, which consists of two parts: I. REFUTATION: 1. of the charge of polluting the temple; 2. of stirring up sedition; 3. of being a leader of any sect who had a different worship from the God of their fathers. II. AFFIRMATION: 1. that he had lived so as to preserve a good conscience towards God, and towards men; 2. that so far from polluting the temple, he had been purified in…

Read AdamClarke on Acts 24 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

10–21. St Paul’s answer to the charge10. Then Paul, &c.] When the governor had given him leave to speak the Apostle addressed his defence to the points charged against him. He had not excited the people, nor been the leader of any body of Nazarenes, nor had he polluted the temple.thou hast been of many years a judge] We have arrived in the history at about a.d. 58 or 59, and Felix had been made procurator in a.d. 52. So that “many years” is about six or seven. But many of the governors were recalled before they had held office so long. In Acts 24:17 “many years” must be about four or five.I do the more cheerfully, &c.] The best MSS. have the positive, “I cheerfully make my defence.” St Paul…

Read Cambridge on Acts 24 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Had beckoned unto him to speak - Either by a nod or by the hand, Hast been of many years - Felix and Cumanus had been joint governors of Judea; but after Cumanus had been condemned for his bad

Read Albert Barnes on Acts 24 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

When the governor motioned for Paul to speak, he began his response: “Knowing that you have been a judge over this nation for many years, I gladly make my defense.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

When the governor had beckoned to him to speak, Paul answered, “Because I know that you have been a judge of this nation for many years, I cheerfully make my defense,

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

When the governor motioned for Paul to speak, he began his response: “Knowing that you have been a judge over this nation for many years, I gladly make my defense.

NETBNew English Translation2006

When the governor gestured for him to speak, Paul replied, “Because I know that you have been a judge over this nation for many years, I confidently make my defense.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Then Paul, after that the governor had beckoned unto him to speak, answered, Forasmuch as I know that thou hast been of many years a judge unto this nation, I do the more cheerfully answer for myself:

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And when the governor had beckoned unto him to speak, Paul answered, Forasmuch as I know that thou hast been of many years a judge unto this nation, I cheerfully make my defence:

RVARevised Version, American1894

And when the governor had beckoned unto him to speak, Paul answered, Forasmuch as I know that thou hast been of many years a judge unto this nation, I do cheerfully make my defence:

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Then Paul, after the governor had beckoned to him to speak, answered, Forasmuch as I know that thou hast been for many years a judge to this nation, I do the more cheerfully answer for myself:

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Then Paul, after that the gouernour had beckened vnto him that hee shoulde speake, answered, I do the more gladly answere for my selfe, for as much as I knowe that thou hast bene of many yeres a iudge vnto this nation,

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

But Paul, the governor having beckoned to him to speak, answered, Knowing that for many years thou hast been judge to this nation, I answer readily as to the things which concern myself.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

And Paul answered — the governor having beckoned to him to speak — 'Knowing [that] for many years thou hast been a judge to this nation, the more cheerfully the things concerning myself I do answer;

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

And Paul—the governor having beckoned to him to speak—answered, “Knowing [that] for many years you have been a judge to this nation, I answer more cheerfully the things concerning myself;

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

But when the governor motioned for Paul to speak, Paul answered, “I understand that for many years you have been a judge to this nation, and so I gladly explain myself to you.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

Then Paul answered, (the governor making a sign to him to speak:) Knowing that for many years thou hast been judge over this nation, I will with good courage answer for myself.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

The Governor motioned for Paul to respond. “Recognizing you have been a judge over this nation for many years, I gladly make my defense,” Paul began.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Then when the ruler had given him a sign to make his answer, Paul said, Because I have knowledge that you have been a judge over this nation for a number of years, I am glad to make my answer:

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἡγεμόνοςhēgemōn governor G2232 2 different renderings
governorASV BSB DBY DRA FBV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
rulerBBE
ἐπιστάμενοςepistamai knowing [these] G1987 3 different renderings
knowASV KJV NETB NWB RVA WEB
knowingBSB DBY DRA LSV MSB
understandULB

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseτεthenclauseverbἈπεκρίθηAnswerednoun phrase · subject-ΠαῦλοςPaulclauseverbνεύσαντοςhaving made a signindirect objectαὐτῷto himnoun phrase · subjectτοῦtheἡγεμόνοςgovernorobjectλέγεινto speakclauseclause · adverbialclause · objectprepositional phrase · adverbialἘκFornoun phraseπολλῶνmanyἐτῶνyearslinking verbὄνταas beingsubjectσεyoupredicateκριτὴνjudgenoun phrase · adverbialnoun phraseτῷtoἔθνειnationτούτῳthisverbἐπιστάμενοςknowingadverbialεὐθύμωςcheerfullynoun phrase · objectτὰto the thingsprepositional phraseπερὶconcerningἐμαυτοῦmyselfverbἀπολογοῦμαιI make a defenseclauseverbδυναμένουBeing ablesubjectσουyouclause · objectclauseverbἐπιγνῶναιto knowclauseὅτιthatclauseclauseadverbialοὐnotpredicateπλείουςmore thanlinking verbεἰσίνthere areadverbialμοιto menoun phrase · subjectἡμέραιdaysδώδεκαtwelveprepositional phrase · adverbialἀφ’fromnoun phraseclauseadverbialἧςwhichverbἀνέβηνI went upclause · adverbialverbπροσκυνήσωνto worshipprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςinἹερουσαλήμJerusalemκαὶAndclauseclauseverbεὗρόνdid they findclause · objectclausesubjectμεmeprepositional phrase · adverbialπρόςwithτιναanyoneverbδιαλεγόμενονreasoningorclausenoun phrase · objectἐπίστασινa tumultuous gatheringὄχλουof a crowdverbποιοῦνταmakingprepositional phrase · adverbialοὔτεneitherprepositional phraseἐνinnoun phraseτῷtheἱερῷtempleοὔτεnorprepositional phraseἐνinnoun phraseταῖςtheσυναγωγαῖςsynagoguesοὔτεnorprepositional phraseκατὰinnoun phraseτὴνtheπόλινcityοὐδὲNorclauseverbδύνανταίare they ableclause · objectverbπαραστῆσαιto proveindirect objectσοιto youprepositional phrase · adverbialπερὶconcerningnoun phraseclausesecond objectὧν[the things] of whichadverbialνυνὶnowverbκατηγοροῦσίνthey accuseobjectμουme

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Respondit autem Paulus (annuente sibi præside dicere) : Ex multis annis te esse judicem genti huic sciens, bono animo pro me satisfaciam.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܪܡܙ ܗܓܡܘܢܐ ܠܦܘܠܘܣ ܕܢܡܠܠ ܘܥܢܐ ܦܘܠܘܣ ܘܐܡܪ ܡܢ ܫܢܝܐ ܣܓܝܐܬܐ ܝܕܥ ܐܢܐ ܕܐܝܬܝܟ ܕܝܢܐ ܕܥܡܐ ܗܢܐ ܘܡܛܠ ܗܢܐ ܚܕܝܐܝܬ ܢܦܩ ܐܢܐ ܪܘܚܐ ܥܠ ܐܦܝ ܢܦܫܝ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Ἀπεκρίθη τε Παῦλος, νεύσαντος αὐτῷ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος λέγειν· ἐκ πολλῶν ἐτῶν ὄντα σε κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ ἐπιστάμενος εὐθύμως τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι·

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Ἀπεκρίθη τε Παῦλος, νεύσαντος αὐτῷ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος λέγειν· ἐκ πολλῶν ἐτῶν ὄντα σε κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ ἐπιστάμενος εὐθύμως τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι·

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

Ἀπεκρίθη τε Παῦλος, νεύσαντος αὐτῷ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος λέγειν· ἐκ πολλῶν ἐτῶν ὄντα σε κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ ἐπιστάμενος εὐθύμως τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι·

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

Ἀπεκρίθη τε Παῦλος, νεύσαντος αὐτῷ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος λέγειν· ἐκ πολλῶν ἐτῶν ὄντα σε κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ ἐπιστάμενος εὐθύμως τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι·

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

Ἀπεκρίθη τε Παῦλος, νεύσαντος αὐτῷ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος λέγειν· ἐκ πολλῶν ἐτῶν ὄντα σε κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ ἐπιστάμενος εὐθύμως τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι·

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

Ἀπεκρίθη τε Παῦλος, νεύσαντος αὐτῷ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος λέγειν· ἐκ πολλῶν ἐτῶν ὄντα σε κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ ἐπιστάμενος εὐθύμως τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι·

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

Ἀπεκρίθη Παῦλος, νεύσαντος αὐτῷ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος λέγειν· ἐκ πολλῶν ἐτῶν ὄντα σε κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ ἐπιστάμενος εὐθύμως τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι·

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

Ἀπεκρίθη Παῦλος, νεύσαντος αὐτῷ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος λέγειν· ἐκ πολλῶν ἐτῶν ὄντα σε κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ ἐπιστάμενος εὐθύμως τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι·

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
τε thenNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Acts 24:10ἀποκρίνομαιAnsweredAnsweredἀποκρίνομαιτέthenthenτέ<the><the>ΠαῦλοςPaul,Paul,Παῦλοςνεύωwhen was siwhen was signalνεύωαὐτόςto himto himαὐτόςthetheἡγεμώνgovernorgovernorἡγεμώνλέγωto speak:to speak:λέγωἐκForForἐκπολύςmanymanyπολύςἔτοςyearsyearsἔτοςεἰμίas beingas beingεἰμίσύyouyouσύκριτήςjudgejudgeκριτής<the><the>ἔθνοςto nationto nationἔθνοςοὗτοςthisthisοὗτοςἐπίσταμαιknowing [thknowing [these]ἐπίσταμαιεὐθύμωςencouragingencouragingεὐθύμωςthings,things,περίconcerningconcerningπερίἐγώmyselfmyselfἐγώἀπολογέομαιI present aI present a defἀπολογέομαιἀπόPrep. fromPrep. from, awaἀπόἡγέομαιv. I lead,v. I lead, thinἡγέομαικρίνωv. I judgev. I judge, decκρίνωεἴωθαv. I am acv. I am accustoεἴωθαεὖAdv well, Adv well, well εὖκαίCj. and, eCj. and, even, καίπαύωv. I causev. I cause to cπαύωἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦφημίv. I sayv. I sayφημίἐφίστημιv. I standv. I stand by, ἐφίστημινοῦςn.m. the mn.m. the mind, νοῦςπέρανAdv over, Adv over, beyonπέρανλόγοςn.m. a worn.m. a word, spλόγοςΣιλᾶςn.m. Silasn.m. SilasΣιλᾶςἐπερωτάωv. I interv. I interrogatἐπερωτάωἀμήνHebr. veriHebr. verily, tἀμήνΠέτροςn.m. Petern.m. PeterΠέτρος
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Acts 24:10

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
Ἀπεκρίθηapokrinō Answered G611 Verb · aorist · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singular
231× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To answer or respond, as in Matthew 27:12 and Mark 14:61, where Jesus answers the high priest. It can also mean to begin speaking or to give a reply. The KJV translates it as 'answer'.
Tyndale gloss
to answer
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀποκρίνομαι (apokrinomai) is built from the prefix ἀπο- and the root κρίνω, meaning to separate or distinguish. It primarily means to answer or reply, often in a context where a response is expected. In the New Testament, it appears in various forms, particularly in legal or conversational contexts, such as in Matthew 3:15 and John 1:49.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπο-κρίνω,

[in LXX chiefly for ענה;]

in cl.,

to separate, distinguish.

to choose. Mid., to answer: Mt 27:12, Mk 14:61, Lk 3:16 23:9, Jo 5:17, 19, Ac 3:12. In late Gk. the pass, also is used in this sense, and pass. forms are the more freq. in NT (M, Pr., 39, 161; MM, s.v.);

in general sense: absol., Mk 12:34; c. acc. rei, Mt 22:46; c. dat. pers., Mt 12:38; seq. πρός, Ac 25:16;

Hebraistically

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀποκρίνομαι. Syil 928°? (Magnesia, early 11,8.6.) περὶ ταύτης τῆς] χώρας τῆς παρὰ IIpinvéwy ἀποκεκριμένης οὔσης shows the old ἀποκρίνω in passive. For the combination of pf. partic. and ὦν, cf. Col 12. In P Ryl II. 122" (a.p. 127) εἰς τὸ κἀμὲ δύνασθαι ἀποκριθῆναι τῶι δημοσίωι, ‘enabling me thus to fulfil my duties towards the Treasury” (Edd.), we have an , ἀποκρίνομαι isolated ex. of the passive aor. not meaning ‘‘answer.” This latter, so overwhelmingly predominant in NT, is rather surprisingly uncommon in the non-literary Kow#. Early inscriptional instances are Sy// 328" (8.6. 84) ἀπεκρίθην κα]λῶς [αὐτ]όν [τε δεδωἸκέναι kal KrA., 24. 307%! (B.C. 150-47) ἔδοξεν... τούτοις φιλανθρώπως ἀποκριθῆναι, 25. 9305: (B.C. 112), same phrase: the last two are senatus consulta, starting in Latin. Similarly the dialectic Sy// 654° (Ὁ ii/B.c.) ἀποκριθῆμεν τοῖς πρεσβευταῖς διότι KTA. Mayser, p. 379…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀποκρίνω (apokrinō) — to answer.

ἀποκρίνω [ῑ],

future -κρῐνῶ, set apart, probably in [Refs 7th c.BC+]:—passive, to be parted or separated, ἀποκρινθέντε parted from the throng (of two πρόμαχοι), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the elements in cosmogony, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀποκεκρίσθαι εἰς ἓν ὄνομα to be separated and brought under one name, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ βεβαίως ἀπεκρίθησαν, of combatants, separated without decisive result, [Refs]

2. in Medicine texts in passive, to be distinctly formed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the embryo, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὰ ἐν τῷ σώματι -όμενα bodily secretions, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but ἐς τοῦτο πάντα ἀπεκρίθη all illnesses determined or ended in this alone, [Refs 5th c.BC+]are voided, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀποκρίνομαι

apokrinomai

from 575 and krino; to conclude for oneself, i.e. (by implication) to

respond; by Hebraism (compare 6030) to begin to speak (where an

address is expected):--answer.

see GREEK for 575

see HEBREW for 06030

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀποκρίνομαι

v.

I answer, reply

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀποκρίνομαι apokrinomai 231x

to answer, Mt. 3:15; in NT to respond to certain present circumstances, to avow, Mt. 11:25

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-ADI-3S — Verb · aorist · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singular
aorist middle deponent indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-ADI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: middle Deponent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
47%answering
answering47% · 115×answered36% · 89×he answered4% · 9×they answered3% · 8×other renderings9% · 23×other renderings1% · 3×

247 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb59%adverbial41%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 231 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
λόγοςa word, speech, ἐγώσύ
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theΠέτροςPeterὅς
τότεthen
θεόςGod, a god
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe
οὐδείςno one, none, nothin
αὐτόςπρεσβύτεροςelderοὐκέτιNeg
ἀποκρίνομαιAnswered231×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theλέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesus
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theοὐNeg
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusΠέτροςPeterἄγγελοςan angel, messen
ἸησοῦςJesus
καίand, even, also,οὔτεNegArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀποκρίνομαι · 231× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke Mark Acts Colossians Revelation

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 118 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.46c. AD 40

ὁ δὲ ἀποκρίνεται ὅτι, ὦ ψευδοδοξοῦσα, οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ νοῦς αἴτιον οὐδενός, ἀλλ’ ὁ πρὸ τοῦ νοῦ θεός·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.174c. AD 75–95

ἐκ μέντοι τῶν κλάδων ἀνίησι κάλυκα προσεχῆ τῷ κλωνί, περίεισι δʼ αὐτὴν ἔλυτρον, ὅπερ ἀποκρίνεται κατʼ αὐτὸ πρὸς τὸν καρπὸν μεταβαλεῖν ἠργμένης·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 12.4c. AD 96

ἐπισταθέντων δὲ τῶν παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ λεγόντων: Πρὸς σὲ εἰσῆλθον οἱ κατάσκοποι τῆς γῆς ἡμῶν: ἐξάγαγε αὐτούς, ὁ γὰρ βασιλεὺς οὕτως κελεύει, ἥδε ἀπεκρίθη: Εἰσῆλθον μὲν οἱ ἄνδρες, οὓς ζητεῖτε, πρός με, ἀλλ̓ εὐθέως ἀπῆλθον καὶ πορεύονται τῇ ὁδῷ:…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Amh. 2 65 RoHermopolisAD 117–AD 127

Δίδυμος· ὅλως ἀμφοδογραμματεὺς οὐ καθίστησιν σιτολόγον. ἐκεῖνος· σὺ αὐτοὺς εἰσέδωκας ἐργολαβῆσαι θέλων. Πομπήιος Πλάντας ἀποκρίνεται· Ἑρμαῖος ὁ ἀδελφὸς … πράγματι ε … … … … ματι εἰργολάβησεν … Πομπήιος

P.Fay. 203 descr.Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 148–AD 150

γὰρ επ … … ἁπλῆς πράσεως … τ … … εἶπεν· τί πρὸς ταῦτα ἀποκρίνῃ; … … αι καὶ μηδε … … … η τοῖς ονη … … βοηθῆσαι

PSI 10 1100ArsinoitesAD 161

περιγραφῇ τῇ ἐμῇ ταῦτα βασταχθῇ καὶ παραπόληται τῷ ταμίῳ. Φαῦστος ἐπύθετο· ὑπὸ τίνος βασταχθῇ; ἀπεκρίνατο· ὑπὸ τῶν σιτολόγων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων. ἐὰν οὖν σοι δοκῆι, κατάστησόν τινας ἐπακολουθοῦντας. Φαῦστος

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
τεde then G5037 Conjunction
209× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A conjunction meaning and or both, used to connect words or ideas closely. Found in Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33, it shows a strong link between things.
Tyndale gloss
and/both
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τέ (te) is an enclitic copulative particle that functions similarly to the Latin '-que' and is used to denote a closer connection than the more general καί (kai). It appears primarily in the New Testament, especially in the book of Acts, and can mean 'and,' 'both,' or 'also.' Notably, it is used in verses like Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = et, ac, atque), not very freq. in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac.

τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (Bl., §77, 8): Mt 28:12, Jo 4:42, Ac 2:33, 37, 40 10:22 11:21, al.

Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Ac 26:16 Ro 14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Lk 12:45, Ac 1:1 15:9 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τέ, (as δέ comes fr. δή, μέν fr. μήν, so τέ fr. the adv. TH, prop. as; [al. ally it with καί, ef. Curtius $§ 27, 647; Vaniéek p. 95; Fick Pt. i. 32; Donaldson, New Crat. § 195]), a copulative enclitie particle (on the use of which ef. Hermann ad Vig. p. 833; Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 739 sqq.); in the N. T. it occurs most frequently in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in Mk. once, viz. xv. 36 RG; in John’s Gospel three times; nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in the Epistles of John and Peter; twice in text. Rec. of Rev., viz. i. 2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from the particle καί in that the latter is conjunctive, τέ adjunctive [W. § 53, 2; ace. to Baéumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 145), καί introduces something new under the same aspect yet as an external addition, whereas τέ marks it as…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τε (te) — and/both.

τε,

enclitic Particle, with two main uses (see. infr. A, B).

__A as a Conjunction,

__A.I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second, ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usually short in [Refs 8th c.BC+], longer in later Gr., e.g. ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ᾽ ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ᾽ ἀδικήσαντες κατ᾽ ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen.[Refs 3rd c.BC+]; κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+], compare 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (which see); τε may be used three or more times…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τέ

te

a primary particle (enclitic) of connection or addition; both or also

(properly, as correlation of 2532):--also, and, both, even, then,

whether. Often used in composition, usually as the latter participle.

see GREEK for 2532

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τέ

Disj.prt.

and, both

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τε te 215x

enclitic, can function as a conj., serving either as a lightly-appending link, Acts 1:15; and, Acts 2:3; or as an inclusive prefix, Lk. 12:45; both, Lk. 24:20; Acts 26:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
37%then
then37% · 84×both35% · 79×and14% · 32×also11% · 26×other renderings3% · 6×

227 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject20%adverbial19%object13%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 209 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀνευρίσκωI find by seekinδιαγογγύζωI murmur greatlyφίλος
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
πιστεύωI believe, have κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπᾶςall, the whole,
λέγωI say, speak
καρδίαthe heart, innerφυλακήa watching, guarθεόςGod, a god
πολύςmuch, many, often
σφόδραexceedingly, greἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemαὐτός
ἐν
ἐγώμάρτυςa witnessποιέωI do, make
τέthen209×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Ἕλληνa Hellene, a Greγυνήa woman, wife, mArticle the
Article the
ΠαῦλοςPaulχώραregion, land, fiπόλιςa city
αὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakπεριαστράπτωI flash around l
πρός
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
γάρfor
θῆλυςfemaleἐπιθυμίαdesire, eagernesζάωI live

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτέ · 209× in the New Testament
Acts Hebrews Romans Luke 1 Corinthians John Matthew 2 Corinthians James Ephesians Jude Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
ho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
Παῦλος,Paulos Paul, G3972 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
158× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Paul, originally named Saul, was a Roman apostle who wrote many letters in the New Testament, including Romans and 1 Corinthians. He is a key figure in the early Christian church.
Tyndale gloss
Paul
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Παῦλος (transliterated as Paulos) refers to Paul, a prominent figure in the New Testament, specifically the Apostle Paul. It is of Latin origin, meaning 'little,' and is used frequently in the Acts of the Apostles and the Epistles. The name also appears in reference to Sergius Paulus, a Roman proconsul mentioned in Acts 13:7.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

Sergius Paulus: Ac 13:7.

the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Ac 13:9, and freq. throughout Ac., Ro 1:1, I Co 1:1, al., II Pe 3:15.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Παῦλος. The designation Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος οἱ Ac 13° is fully discussed by Deissmann 4S, p. 313 ff., where it is shown that the Apostle was already in possession of the double name at the time referred to: cf. Ramsay Paw/, p. 81 ff. Elsewhere (Recent Discovery, p. 356) Ramsay suggests that Paul’s complete Roman name may have been “Ὁ. Julius Paullus,” in view of the frequent conjunction of the names Julius Paullus in Lycaonia. In the important letter on the Meletian Schism, P Lond 19145® (A.D. 3352), greetings are conveyed to Παῦλον τὸν ἀναγνώστην : the editor refers to a priest of the same name (ἀπὸ Tnévas) in 2. 191744 (c. A.D. 330-340), and to ὃ μακάριος Παῦλος in 74. 1919% (same date). The name is not uncommon in the inscrr., see e.g. Perg 374 A® (time of Augustus), where ’A. Καστρίκιος Παῦλος is included among the choristers of θεὸς Σεβαστὸς kal θεὰ Ρώμη in Pergamum: cf. Thieme…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Παῦλος (Paulos) — Paul.

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7.

2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1, 1Co.1:1, al., 2Pe.3:15.

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Παῦλος (Paulos) — Paulus.

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7.

2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1,

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

∏αῦλος

Paulos

of Latin origin; (little; but remotely from a derivative of 3973,

meaning the same); Paulus, the name of a Roman and of an

apostle:--Paul, Paulus.

see GREEK for 3973

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Παῦλος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

Paul

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Παῦλος Paulos 158x

Paulus, Paul, pr. name. (1) Paul, the Apostle, Acts 13:9, et al. freq. (2) Sergius Paulus, the deputy or proconsul of Cyprus, Acts 13:7

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Paul

=Saul (q.v.) was born about the same time as our Lord. His circumcision-name was Saul, and probably the name Paul was also given to him in infancy “for use in the Gentile world,” as “Saul” would be his Hebrew home-name. He was a native of Tarsus, the capital of Cilicia, a Roman province in the south-east of Asia Minor. That city stood on the banks of the river Cydnus, which was navigable thus far; hence it became a centre of extensive commercial traffic with many countries along the shores of the Mediterranean, as well as with the countries of central Asia Minor. It thus became a city distinguished for the wealth of its inhabitants.

Tarsus was also the seat of a famous university, higher in reputation even than the universities of Athens and Alexandria, the only others that then existed. Here Saul was born, and here he spent his youth, doubtless enjoying the best education…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(small, little). Nearly all the original materials for the life St. Paul are contained in the Acts of the Apostles and in the Pauline epistles. Paul was born in Tarsus, a city of Cilicia. (It is not improbable that he was born between A.D. 0 and A.D. 5.) Up to the time of his going forth as an avowed preacher of Christ to the Gentiles, the apostle was known by the name of Saul. This was the Jewish name which he received from his Jewish parents. But though a Hebrew of the Hebrews, he was born in a Gentile city. Of his parents we know nothing, except that his father was of the tribe of Benjamin, (Philemon 3:5) and a Pharisee, (Acts 23:6) that Paul had acquired by some means the Roman franchise ("I was free born,") (Acts 22:23)…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The distinguished "apostle of the Gentiles;" also called SAUL, a Hebrew name. He is first called Paul in Ac 13:12; and as some think, assumed this Roman name according to a common custom of Jews in foreign lands, or in honor of Sergius Paulus, Ac 13:7, his friend and an early convert. Both names however may have belonged to him in childhood. He was born at Tarsus in Cilicia, and inherited from his father the privileges of a Roman citizen. His parents belonged to the tribe of Benjamin, and brought up their son as "a Hebrew of the Hebrews," Php 3:5. Tarsus was highly distinguished for learning and culture, and the opportunities for improvement it afforded were no doubt diligently improved by Paul. At a suitable age he was sent to…

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

small; little

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
97%paul
paul97% · 159×other renderings3% · 5×

164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject60%object18%adverbial15%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 158 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
δέbut, on the otheτότεthenτέDisj
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theἀνίστημιI raise up, set διαπονέομαιI am greatly tro
ἐγώ
δέbut, on the otheὁράωI see, look uponχάρινon account of
καίand, even, also, nam
ΒαρναβᾶςBarnabasArticle the
χείρa hand
ἐμόςArticle the
ΠαῦλοςPaul,158×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theΒαρναβᾶςBarnabasΣιλᾶςSilas
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, μαθητήςa learner, disciσυνέδριονa council, the S
λέγωI say, speak
διάArticle theθέλωI will, wish, de
ἀπόστολοςan apostle, a messen
Χριστόςanointed, the MeοὐNeg
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,ἀξιόωI account or treἐπιλέγωI call, choose f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΠαῦλος · 158× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Colossians Philemon 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians Ephesians Galatians 1 Timothy 2 Peter 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 19.102c. AD 75–95

προεξῄεσαν δὲ Κλαύδιος μὲν ὁ πάτρως αὐτοῦ καὶ Μᾶρκος Βινίκιος ὁ τῆς ἀδελφῆς ἀνὴρ ἔτι δὲ Οὐαλέριος Ἀσιατικός, οὓς οὐδὲ βουλομένοις διακλεῖσαι δύναμις ἦν αἰδοῖ τῆς ἀξιώσεως, εἵπετο δʼ αὐτὸς σὺν Παύλῳ Ἀρουντίῳ.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 5.5c. AD 96

διὰ ζῆλον καὶ ἔριν Παῦλος ὑπομονῆς βραβεῖον ὑπέδειξεν,

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.12.2c. AD 110

πάροδός ἐστε τῶν εἰς θεὸν ἀναιρουμένων, Παύλου συμμύσται τοῦ ἡγιασμένου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 8th c. AD
ÉdP 7 (1948), p. 40-Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 311

σαργάνη α Ἀεῖς Σαλιοῦτος σαργάνη α Ἰσίδωρος Ἡρᾶ σαργάνη α Ἥρων Ἀπώνεως σαργάνη α Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου σαργάνη α Πελῆνις σαργάναι β Ἀχιλλᾶς Ἀντωνίνου σαργάνη α Ἰσιδώρα Πτολεμαίου σαργάνη α

P.Cair. Isid. 20Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 314

Ἀτισίου Διόσκορος Κάστορος Παμοῦν Ἥρωνος Νεᾶς μητρὸς Τύχης κτηνῶν ὁμοίως Ἀτῖσις Ἀβοίκεως Δοῦλος Λεονίδου Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου Σαβῖνος Ἀχιλλᾶ Οὐενᾶφρις Ἀιώνεως Σώτας Ἀπολλωνίου Παῆσις Σεταβοῦ Οὐενᾶφρις Παησίου Κοπρῆς Παλήμωνος Μιὼς

P.Cair. Isid. 28Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 312–AD 323

δραχμαὶ Γ Ἡρᾶς Βακχείου ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Ἁτρῆς εἰρηνάρχης ἀρτάβαι β τάλαντα β Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Κάλλων Οὐενάφρεως ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Παπέεις Ἀιώνεως ἀρτάβη

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
νεύσαντοςneuō when was signalling G3506 Verb · aorist · active · participle · genitive · singular · masculine
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To nod or signal to someone, like beckoning them to come over, as seen in John 13:24 and Acts 24:10.
Amplified meaning
signaled, beckoned
Tyndale gloss
to motion
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

νεύω is a verb meaning to nod or beckon, often used to indicate a sign or command. It appears in various contexts, from nodding in assent to signaling someone to act. The New Testament references include John 13:24 and Acts 24:10. The entries suggest a consistent meaning related to motion or inclination, without significant disagreement among lexicons.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νεύω,

[in LXX: Pr 4:5 21:1*;]

to nod or beckon, as a sign : c. dat. pers. et inf., Jo 13:24, Ac 24:10 (cf. δια-, ἐκ-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, κατα-νεύω).†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νεύω (neuō) — to motion.

νεύω,

[Refs 8th c.BC+]: future νεύσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist ἔνευσα, Epic dialect νεῦσα (see. below): perfect νένευκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—incline in any direction:

1. nod, beckon, as a sign, νεύσω μέν τοι ἐγὼ κεφαλῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; beckon with the hand, δεξιᾷ δέ μοι ἔνευσε [Refs 2nd c.BC+]: with infinitive, beckon to one to do a thing, in token of command, νεανίαις ἔνευσε παρθένον λαβεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. nod or bow in token of assent, ἐπὶ γλεφάροις ν. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; νεῦσον, Κρονίων [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with accusative et infinitive, grant, assure, promise that.., νεῦσε δέ οἱ λαὸν σόον ἔμμεναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with infinitive future, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with infinitive aorist, [Refs 1st c.BC+]: with accusative of things, grant, promise, νεῦσε δέ οἱ…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

νεύω

neuo

apparently a primary verb; to "nod", i.e. (by analogy),

signal:--beckon.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νεύω

v.

I nod, make a sign

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νεύω neuō 2x

to nod; to intimate by a nod or significant gesture, Jn. 13:24; Acts 24:10*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

νεύω to nod or beckon, as a sign, Hom.: c. inf. to beckon to one to do a thing, in token of command, Hom., Eur.

to nod or bow in token of assent, Hom., Soph.:—c. acc. et inf. to promise that, Il.:—c. acc. rei, to grant, promise, Soph., Eur.

generally, to bow the head, bend forward, of warriors charging, Il.; of ears of corn, Hes.; ν. κάτω to stoop, Eur.:—c. acc. cogn., ν. κεφαλήν Od.

to incline in any way, ν. εἴς τι to incline towards, Thuc.:—of countries, like Lat. vergere, to slope, ν. εἰς δύσιν Polyb.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-GSM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-GSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%when was signalling
when was signalling50% · 1×motions50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ΠαῦλοςPaul
Article the
νεύωwhen was signalling
what comes after →
οὖνtherefore, then
οὗτος
αὐτός
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceνεύω · 2× in the New Testament
Acts John
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.34c. AD 40

νεύει δὲ πρὸς τὰς τῶν ἀποτελεσμάτων ἐκπληρώσεις ἡ ἐν τῷ κινεῖσθαι, διὸ καὶ χείρων τῆς κατὰ σχέσιν ἐστίν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 7.175c. AD 75–95

πέμψαντος δὲ τοῖς ἰδίοις ἐκέλευσεν ὁπηνίκʼ ἂν ἴδωσι τὸν Ἀμνῶνα μέθῃ παρειμένον καὶ κάρῳ, νεύσαντος αὐτοῦ φονεύσωσι μηδένα φοβηθέντες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD
O.Bodl. 1 328Theben (?)201 BC–2 BC

Κεφάλωνι ρμ Σ … … νευει … Πετεμενώφει … γίνονται Β

μέρους λελογχέναι ἐπὶ τῆς δευτέρας στέγης ἀνδρεῶνα ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθε μέρεσι οὗ ἡ θύρα νεύει εἰς ἀπηλιώτην καὶ ἐν τῷ καταγαίῳ καμάραν νεύουσαν εἰς ἀπηλιώτην καὶ τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μοι

P. Münch. 1 16SyeneAD 476–AD 500

καὶ οἰκία Μαρτυρίας Ταχβὰρ καὶ Εὐχαρίου Κύρου κεντυρίωνος , βορρᾶ ῥύμη δημοσία, εἰς ἣν νεύει ἡ αὐθεντικὴ αὐτῆς θύρα, ἀπηλιώτου αὐλὴ Πετεροοῦτος, λιβὸς οἰκία μου τοῦ ὠνουμένου ὁ δὲ

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
αὐτῷautos to him G846 Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Amplified meaning
the apostle, originally named Saul
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-DSM — Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-DSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςto him5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
τοῦho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
ἡγεμόνοςhēgemōn governor G2232 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
20× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to a high-ranking official, such as a governor or leader of a province. In the New Testament, it is used to describe the Roman rulers of Judea, like Pontius Pilate in Matthew 27:2 and Luke 20:20.
Amplified meaning
ruler, high-ranking official
Tyndale gloss
ruler
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἡγεμών (i.e., *hēgemōn*) means a leader or governor, often referring to a Roman provincial governor. It can denote various types of leaders, including commanders and guides. In the New Testament, it is used specifically for figures like Pilate, the governor of Judea (e.g., Mt 27:2). The lexicons show some variation in the nuances of its meaning, particularly regarding its application to different types of authority.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἡγεμών, -όνος, ὁ

(ἡγέομαι),

[in LXX for אַלּוּף, שַׂר, etc.;]

a leader, guide.

a commander.

a governor of a province (proconsul, propraetor, legate, or procurator; but cf. ἀνθύπατος): Mt 10:18, Mk 13:9, Lk 21:12, I Pe 2:14; of the Procurator of Judæa, Mt 27:2, 11, 14, 15, 21, 27 28:14, Lk 20:20, Ac 23:24, 26, 33 24:1, 10 26:30.

For Heb. אַלְפֵי (LXX, χίλιαι) misread אַלֻּפֵי, leaders: Mt 2:6 (OT).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἡγεμών, -όνος, ὁ, (ἡγέομαι), in class. Grk. a word of very various signification: a leader of any kind, a guide, ruler, prefect, president, chief, general, commander, sovereign; in the N. T. spec. 1. a ‘legatus Caesaris,’ an officer administering a province in the name and with the authority of the Roman emperor; the governor of a province: Mt. x. 18; Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xxi. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 14. 2. a procurator (Vulg. praeses; Luth. Landpfleger), an officer who was attached to a proconsul or a propraetor and had charge of the imperial revenues; in causes relating to these revenues he administered justice, (called ἐπίτροπος, διοικητής, in prof. auth.). In the smaller provinces also, which were so to speak appendages of the greater, he discharged the functions of governor of the province; and such was the relation of the procurator of Judwa to the governor of Syria (cf. Krebs, Observy. p. 61…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἡγεμών. The breadth of this word and its derivatives, which in a single verse (Lk 31) can be applied to the Emperor and to the chargé d’affaires of a tiny district like Judaea, is well seen in the papyri. Thus in P Lille I. 417 (B.c. 218-7) the editor notes that it means “‘ officier en général, et plus particuliérement, dans certains cas, officier d’infanterie.” He compares P Rev L***vii-3, where Dr. Grenfell points out that **the hegemones are thus subordinate to the strategi ; nevertheless the Romans chose this title as an equivalent for the praefectus.” See also the notes on P Tor I. 1+} (8.6. 117-6) and on OGZS 69%, and the Index to OG/S, where four different connotations are distinguished. The word is used in a general sense of the ‘‘ captain” of a chosen band of youths in P Amh II. 39! (B.c. 103) (= Witkowski?, p. 106) Πόρτεις ἡ[γ]εμὼν τῶν ἐν προχειρισμῶι. For its common use with…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἡγεμών (hēgemōn) — ruler.

ἡγεμών,

Doric dialect ἁγ-, Aeolic dialect ἀγίμων [Refs], όνος, ; also ἡ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— one who leads; and so,

I. in [Refs 8th c.BC+], guide, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a charioteer, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. one who does a thing first, shows the way to others, τοῖς νεωτέροις ἡ. ἠθῶν χρηστῶν γίγνεσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, of choir-leaders, Mnemos.[Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II. in [Refs 8th c.BC+], leader, commander, chief, opposed to λαοί, πληθύς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; στρατηγὸς καὶ ἡ. τῶν 'Ελλήνων πρὸς τὸν βάρβαρον[Refs]; ἔχοντες ἡγεμόνας τῶν πάνυ [στρατηγῶν] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ={λοχαγός}, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; chief, sovereign, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the queen-bee and queen-wasp, regarded by [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ἡ. τῶν προβάτων, of the bell-wether, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν βοῶν[Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἡγεμών

hegemon

from 2233; a leader, i.e. chief person (or figuratively, place) of a

province:--governor, prince, ruler.

see GREEK for 2233

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἡγεμών, όνος, ὁ

n.m.

a governor

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἡγεμών hēgemōn 20x

a guide; a leader; a chieftain, prince, Mt. 2:6; a Roman provincial governor, under whatever title, Mt. 10:18; 27:2; Lk. 20:20; Acts 23:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἡγεμών one who leads, Lat. dux: and so,

in Od., a guide to shew the way, so Hdt., etc.; ἡγ. γενέσθαι τινὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ id. Hdt.

one who is an authority to others, Lat. dux, auctor, τοῖς νεωτέροις ἡγ. ἠθῶν γίγνεσθαι Plat.; ἡγεμόνα εἶναί τινος to be the cause of a thing, Xen., etc.

in Il., a leader, commander, chief, ἡγεμόνες Δαναῶν, φυλάκων, Il., etc.; ἔχοντες ἡγεμόνας τῶν πάνυ στρατηγῶν having some of the best generals as commanders, Thuc.: a chief, sovereign, Pind., Soph., etc.

= Rom. Emperor, Plut.: also a provincial governor, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

guv'-er-ner: The word "governor" is employed in English Versions of the Bible in rendering a great variety of Hebrew and Greek words. In certain cases strict consistency is neither observed nor possible.

1. In the Old Testament:

In the rendering of Hebrew terms account has naturally been taken of the translations offered in Septuagint, which, being the work of different hands, is both uneven in quality and inconsistent. But there are inherent difficulties which can never be entirely overcome. First and most important, there is the difficulty arising from our ignorance of many details of the government of the oriental nations to which the terms apply. Hardly less is the embarrassment occasioned by the vague employment of words in indiscriminate reference to persons of superior rank and somehow exercising authority. There is consequently much confusion in the use of titles such as "deputy,"…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Governor

(1.) Heb. nagid, a prominent, conspicuous person, whatever his capacity: as, chief of the royal palace (2 Chr. 28:7; comp. 1 Kings 4:6), chief of the temple (1 Chr. 9:11; Jer. 20:1), the leader of the Aaronites (1 Chr. 12:27), keeper of the sacred treasury (26:24), captain of the army (13:1), the king (1 Sam. 9:16), the Messiah (Dan. 9:25).

(2.) Heb. nasi, raised; exalted. Used to denote the chiefs of families (Num. 3:24, 30, 32, 35); also of tribes (2:3…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

In the Authorized Version this one English word is the representative of no less than ten Hebrew and four Greek words. The chief of a tribe or family. A ruler in his capacity of lawgiver and dispenser of justice. A ruler consider especially as having power over the property and persons of his subjects. (Genesis 24:2; Joshua 12:2; Psalms 100:20) The "governors of the people," in (2 Chronicles 23:20) appear to have been the king’s body-guard; cf. (2 Kings 11:19) A prominent personage, whatever his capacity. It is applied to a king as the military and civil chief of his people, (

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 28 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 30c. AD 40

τοσούτῳ γὰρ τὸ νοητὸν τοῦ ὁρατοῦ λαμπρότερόν τε καὶ αὐγοειδέστερον ὅσῳπερ ἥλιος, οἶμαι, σκότους καὶ ἡμέρα νυκτὸς καὶ [τὰ κριτήρια] νοῦς, ὁ τῆς ὅλης ψυχῆς ἡγεμών, ὀφθαλμῶν σώματος.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.175c. AD 75–95

ἥκω τε νῦν ὁδοῦ τε ταύτης ἡγεμὼν ἐσόμενος καὶ βίου σου τελευτὴν ἐν ταῖς Ἰωσήπου χερσὶ γενησομένην προδηλῶν καὶ μακρὸν αἰῶνα τῶν σῶν ἐγγόνων ἐν ἡγεμονίᾳ καὶ δόξῃ καταγγέλλων καταστήσων τε αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ὑπέσχημαι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

καὶ οἱ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ πρώτου λεπτοῦ χ … καὶ … σοῦχος ἡγεμὼν καὶ … υχος οὐραγὸς καὶ Πανεχῶτις … καὶ οἱ στρατιῶται … ως Πατεπτ σνου

P.Fay. 203 descr.Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 148–AD 150

τινὰς Καλπουρνιανοῦ καὶ Μαξιμιανοῦ καὶ Νεοκύδους Καλλίνεικος ῥήτωρ ὑπὲρ Σαραπίωνος εἶπεν· ἀναγνώσομαι ἐπιστολὴν μίαν ἡγεμόνος Ὁνοράτου οὐ πρὸ πολλοῦ χρόνου γραφεῖσαν ἐν ᾗ καὶ ἐπὶ ταύταις ταῖς ἀνεγνωσμέναις κρίσεσιν

P.Berl.Leihg. 2 29Lagis (Arsinoites)AD 164

ἀνδρῶν δημοσίων καὶ οὐσιακῶν γεωργῶν τῆς αὐτῆς κώμης. κατὰ τὰ κελευσθέντα ὑπὸ τοῦ λαμπρωτάτου ἡγεμόνος Ἀννίου Συριακοῦ ἀπογραφόμεθα τὰς ἠβροχηκυίας καὶ ἐπηντλημένας ἀρούρας περὶ τὴν κώμην Λαγίδα τῷ ἐνεστῶτι

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
λέγειν·legō to speak: G3004 Verb · present · active · infinitive
2,255× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to say or speak, and it is used by Jesus and others in the New Testament to share teachings and tell stories. It appears in Matthew 9:34 and John 1:29.
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λέγω (legō) is a primary Greek verb meaning 'to say' or 'to speak.' It encompasses a range of uses, including expressing thoughts, making declarations, and narrating events. The New Testament frequently employs it in direct speech and as a way to convey meaning, such as in Matthew 27:11. Abbott-Smith notes its distinction from similar verbs like λαλέω.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λέγω (legō) — to say.

λέγω,

__B pick up, etc.: tenses for signification 1 and 11, future λέξω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἔλεξα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, future in passive sense λέξομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐλεξάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ἐλέγμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, aorist ἐλέχθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]-; post-[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν-), passive εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (see. the compounds); also future λεγήσομαι (συλ-): aorist 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν-):—gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

lego

a primary verb; properly, to "lay" forth, i.e. (figuratively) relate

(in words (usually of systematic or set discourse; whereas 2036 and

5346 generally refer to an individual expression or speech

respectively; while 4483 is properly to break silence merely, and 2980

means an extended or random harangue)); by implication, to mean:--ask,

bid, boast, call, describe, give out, name, put forth, say(-ing, on),

shew, speak, tell, utter.

see GREEK for 2036

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 2980

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λέγω

v.

I say, speak

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAN — Verb · present · active · infinitive
present active infinitive — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5721

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%saying
saying35% · 480×says13% · 175×i say12% · 164×he says9% · 122×say5% · 70×he was saying3% · 42×they say2% · 31×other renderings17% · 225×other renderings4% · 48×

1,357 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 107 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,255 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
αὐτός
πρόςμαθητήςa learner, disciἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτοςἐγώ
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article theδέbut, on the otheγόνυa knee
ἀμήνHebr
ἀμήνHebrαὐτόςλέγωI say, speak
λέγωto speak:2255×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
Article the
μαθητήςa learner, disciἸησοῦςJesusΠέτροςPeter
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becοὐNegἐάνCond
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theπρόςαὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theοὗτοςσύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλέγω · 2,255× in the New Testament
Luke John Matthew Mark Acts Revelation Hebrews Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians James Galatians

76 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,290 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.4c. AD 100

πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων ,

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἑτερᾶς· νότου γῆ Τακοίμιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Χενσθώτου, ἀπηλιώτου Ἀείους, λιβὸς περίχωμα, τῆς δʼ ἄλλης λεγομένης Πκρώ· νότου γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου τοῦ Πατοῦτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πατσεοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
ἐκek For G1537 Preposition
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The preposition 'out from' shows movement or origin, like in John 6:31 and Acts 9:3. It helps us understand where people or things come from or are going.
Tyndale gloss
out from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ (ἐξ),

prep. c. gen.,

from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,

prep. c. gen.,

of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.

Of Place,

of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jo 6:31, Ac 9:3, Ga 1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mt 8:28 17:9, Mk 1:25 7:28, Jo 1:33 20:1, Ac 12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας.) ἐκ, Ju 5, Ac 28:4. Metaph., Mt 7:4, 5, I Pe 2:9; ἐκ τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκ (ek) — out from.

ἐκ,

before a vowel ἐξ, also

__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.

__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:

__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκ

ek

or ex ex

a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or

motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or

figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,

betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),

for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X

heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,

off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,

through,

X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,

with the same general import; often of completion.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκ, ἐξ

Prep.

from out, out from among, from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκ ek 915x

ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκ

ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:

out of, from. c. gen.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.

to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.

to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.

of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.

with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%of
of28% · 258×from26% · 243×out of23% · 216×out from7% · 61×by5% · 51×at2% · 20×other renderings8% · 70×other renderings1% · 14×

933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial69%predicate15%subject11%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becἀνάστασιςa rising again,
αὐτός
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, ἀνίστημιI raise up, set καταβαίνωI go down, come
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegArticle theτίςIrg
εἷςone
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becαὐτός
ἐκFor913×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaθεόςGod, a godστόμαthe mouth, speec
αὐτός
εἰμίI am, existArticle theκαίand, even, also,
νεκρόςdead, a corpse
ἀνίστημιI raise up, set ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, καίand, even, also,
σύ
παραδίδωμιI hand over, delμεριμνάωI am anxious, diἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
ζάωI liveἸησοῦςJesusἀλλάbut, except

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκ · 913× in the New Testament
John Revelation Luke Acts Matthew Mark Romans Galatians 1 Corinthians 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
πολλῶνpolus many G4183 Adjective · genitive · plural · neuter
413× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means much or many, and is used to describe things like large crowds, as in Mark 5:24, or a great amount of time, as in Matthew 25:19. It emphasizes the magnitude of something.
Tyndale gloss
much
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πολύς (polus) means much or many, covering a range of contexts from quantity to degree and value. It appears as an adjective and can also function as a noun or adverb. In the New Testament, it is used to describe large numbers of people or things, as seen in verses like Matthew 9:37 and John 6:10. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ,

[in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms;]

as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Ac 11:21; ὄχλος, Mk 5:24; θερισμός, Mt 9:37; χόρτος, Jo 6:10; χρόνος, Mt 25:19; γογγυσμός, Jo 7:12; πόνος, Col 4:13; δόξα, Mt 24:30; σιγή, Ac 21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mt 13:17; ὄχλοι, Mt 4:25; δαιμόνια, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πολύς, πολλή (fr. an older form πολλός, found in Hom., Hes., Pind.), πολύ; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for 39; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc., many, numerous, great: ἀριθμός, Acts xi. 21; λαός, Acts xviii. 10; ὄχλος, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34; [viii.1 LT Tr WH]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi. 2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.; πλῆθος, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, ete.; 1. q. abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much], καρπός, Jn. xii. 24; xv. 5,8; θερισμός, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt. ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; γῆ, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; χόρτος, Jn. vi. 10; οἶνος, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. πολλοὶ τελῶναι, Mt. ix. 10; Mk. ii. 15; πολλοὶ προφῆται, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24; σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26; πατέρες, 1 Co. iv. 15; δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58, ete.; ὄχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but here L TWH om. Trbr. ὄχ.7; Lk. v. 15, ete.; δαιμόνια, Mk.i. 34; and in many otherexx.; with…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πολύς, “much,” plur. ‘‘many’’: P Petr I. 2905 (iii/B.c.) χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς πολλὴ εἰ ὑγιαίνεις, ‘‘much thanks to the gods if you are well,” P Ryl II. 2435 (ii/A.D.) τοῦτο οὐ μόνον ἡμεῖν yevapevov ἀλλὰ Kal πολλοῖς, ‘this has happened not to us only but to many ” (Edd.), and 16. 238* (A.p. 262) διὰ πολλὰς χρείας, “for various needs’ (Edd.). The word is very conimon in epistolary greetings (πολλὰ χαίρειν : exx. from B.C. 118 to ili/iv A.D. in Exler Eprstolography p. 27 f.) and in rhetorical prefaces (Sirach proem.), and consequently, as Cadbury suggests (in Jackson and Lake Beginnings of Christianity Part I. Vol. ii. p. 492 f.), πολλοί must not be pressed to mean “ἡ Ac 243, 10, For the adverbial πολλά, which ‘‘ lies between πολύ and πολλάκις : it is ‘much’ with the idea of plurality and repetition introduced’’ (Hort ad Jas 32), cf. P Heid 622 (iv/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 127) πολλὰ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πολύς (polus) — much.

πολύς,

Attic dialect πολλή, πολ; genitive πολλοῦ, ῆς, ou=; dative πολλῷ, ῇ, ; accusative πολύν, πολλήν, πολύ:—Ionic dialect πολλός [Refs 6th c.BC+], πολλή, πολλόν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; also in Trag., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative πολλόν, πολλήν, πολλόν: [Refs 5th c.BC+] uses the Ionic dialect forms, but codices have πολύν [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—both sets of forms are found in Epic dialect, also genitive singular πολέος [Refs 8th c.BC+], once contraction πολεῖς [Refs]; dative πολέσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; accusative πολέας (trisyllable) [Refs 8th c.BC+] (frequently with variant{πολεῖς} [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in later Epic dialect πολέες is used as feminine, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—Epic dialect also have πουλύς (once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; these forms are found in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+] — Lyric poetry and Trag. (Lyric poetry) sometimes use Epic dialect forms, dative singular…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ

Adj

much, many, often

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πολύς polys 416x

great in magnitude or quantity, much, large, Mt. 13:5; Jn. 3:23; 15:8; pl. many, Mt. 3:7; in time, long, Mt. 25:19; Mk. 6:35; Jn. 5:6; οἱ πολλοί, the many, the mass, Rom. 5:15; 12:5; 1 Cor. 10:33; τὸ πολύ, much, 2 Cor. 8:15; πολύ, as an adv., much, greatly, Mk. 12:27; Lk. 7:47; of…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πολύς the ionic declension πολλός, ή, όν is retained by the attic in all cases, except the nom. and acc. masc. and neut. Hom. uses both ionic and attic forms. of Number, many, opp. to ὀλίγος, Hom., etc.;— with nouns of multitude, πουλὺς ὅμιλος Od.; πολλὸν πλῆθος Hdt., etc.:—also of anything often repeated, πολλὸν ἦν τοῦτο τὸ ἔπος id. Hdt.; πολλὸς αἰνεόμενος id. Hdt.; τούτῳ πολλῷ χρήσεται τῷ λόγῳ often, Dem.

of Size, Degree, Force, much, mighty, great, Il., etc.; π. ὕπνος deep sleep, Od.; π. ὑμέναιος a loud song, Il., etc.:—rarely of a single person, μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἐγένεο Hdt.; ἢν πολλῇ ῥυῇ if she flow with full stream, metaph. from a river, Eur.; πολλῷ ῥέοντι Dem.; from the wind, πολὺς ἔπνει was blowing strong, id. Dem.; often with a Partic., πολλὸς ἦν λισσόμενος…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-GPN — Adjective · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GPN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

MANY, adjective men'ny.

1. Numerous; comprising a great number of individuals.

Thou shalt be a father of many nations. Genesis 17:4.

Not many wise men after the flesh, not many mighty, not many noble, are called. 1 Corinthians 1:26.

MANY are the afflictions of the righteous. Psalms 34:12.

It is often preceded by as or so, and followed by so, indicating an equal number.

As many books as you take, so many shall be charged to your account.

So many laws argue so many sins.

It is followed by as.

As many as were willing-hearted brought bracelets. Exodus 34:1.

It precedes an or a, before a noun in the singular number.

Full many a gem of purest ray serene.

2. In low language, preceded by too, it denotes powerful or much; as, they are too many for us.

MANY, noun men'ny. A multitude; a great number of individuals; the people.

O thou fond many

The vulgar and the many are fit only to be led or driven.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%many
many52% · 196×great17% · 66×much17% · 65×many things6% · 21×other renderings6% · 23×other renderings2% · 7×

378 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject36%adverbial29%object22%predicate10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 354 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅςεἰς
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἀπώλειαdestruction, ruiἀπέρχομαιI come or go awa
ὄχλοςa crowd
αὐτόςὁράωI see, look uponκαίand, even, also,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theὁράωI see, look uponμετά
αὐτός
παρακαλέωI summon, entreaἀκολουθέωI accompany, attλαλέωI speak, say
πολύςmany413×
what comes after →
Article the
δέbut, on the otheπρῶτοςfirst, beforeσυναναβαίνωI go up with
καίand, even, also, nam
ὡςas, like as, howθεραπεύωI care for, atteεὐθέωςimmediately, soo
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰμίI am, existἐκτέραςa wonder, porten
γάρfor
ἔρχομαιI come, goεἰμίI am, existπάσχωI am acted upon,
μᾶλλονmore, rather
Article theκράζωI cry aloud, shrσύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπολύς · 413× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Mark Matthew John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation Hebrews 1 Timothy 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 335 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 38Pathyrites171 BC

τῶι προγεγραμμένωι ἱερῶι, ὁ ἐνκεκλημένος προσπηδήσας μοι ἐνώπιόν τινων ἔτυπτεν ἧι εἶχεν ῥάβδωι πληγαῖς πλειόσιν εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματός μου. ὅ τε περιεβλήμην, ὀθόνιον κατέρηξεν, περὶ ὦν

P.Grenf. 1 42Diospolis Parva170 BC–169 BC

νυνὶ παρεφεδρευόντων ἐν Διὸς πόλει τῆι μικρᾶι ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῶι ἐν Πτολεμαίδι ὑπαίθρωι. πολλὰς χρείας μισθοφόρων ἱππέων παρεσχημένων ἡμῶν ἤδη πολλάκις κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον καὶ κινδύνους μεγάλους

μέρους ἡμίσους ἀπὸ ἐδάφους ἀμπελῶνος ἀρουρῶν β ἡμίσους ἢ ὅσαν ἂν ἦι ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον καὶ τοῦ ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου αὐτοῦ παραδείσου καὶ φρεάτων καὶ ἐποικίων καὶ ληνῶνος καὶ γῆς

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
ἐτῶνetos years G2094 Noun · genitive · plural · neuter
49× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to a year, like in Luke 3:1 where it says Jesus was baptized in the 15th year of Tiberius' rule. It is also used in Revelation 20:3 to describe a period of time.
Amplified meaning
a long period of time
Tyndale gloss
year
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔτος (i.e., etos) means 'a year.' It is used in various contexts, including references to age and duration, as well as in phrases indicating yearly occurrences. The New Testament cites it in passages like Luke 3:1 and Hebrews 1:12. The word can also appear in different grammatical forms, such as the plural ἔτη.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔτος, -ους, τό

[in LXX for שָׁנֶה ;]

a year: Lk 3:1, He 1:12, Re 20:3, al.; ἔτη ἔχειν, Jo 5:5 8:57; εἶναι, γίνεσθαι, ἐτῶν, Mk 5:42, Lk 2:42, Ac 4:22, I Ti 5:9; dat. pl. of space of time, Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20; acc, in ans. to how long? Mt 9:20, Mk 5:25, Lk 2:36, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔτος, -ους, [gen. plur. ἐτῶν, cf. B. 14 (13)], τό, [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. τ), α year: Lk. iii. 1; Acts vii. 80; Heb. i. 12; 2 Pet. iii. 8; Rev. xx. 3, ete.; ἔτη ἔχειν, to have passed years, Jn. viii. 57; with ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ added, Jn. v. 5 [ef. W. § 32, 6]; εἶναι, γίνεσθαι, yeyovevat ἐτῶν, 6. g. δώδεκα, to be twelve years old [ef. Eng. (a boy) of twelve years]: Mk. v.42; Lk. ii. 42; iii. 23 [ef. W. 349 (328)]; viii. 42; Actsiv. 22; γεγονυῖα ἔλαττον ἐτῶν ἑξήκοντα, less than sixty years old, 1 Tim. v. 9 [W. 590 (549)]; dat. plur., of the space of time within which a thing is done [W. § 31, 9a.; B. § 133, 26], Jn. ii. 20; Acts xiii. 20; ace., in answer to the quest. how long?: Mt. ix. 20; Mk. ν. 25; Lk. ii. 86; xiii. 7 sq. 11,16; xv. εὖ 256 29; Acts vii. 6, 36, 42; Heb. iii. 10 (9), 17; Rev. xx. 2, 4,6. preceded bya prep.: ἀπό, from... on, since, Lk. viii. 43; Ro. xv. 23; in the same sense…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔτος. P Tebt 11. 412% (late ii/A.D.) ἄνελθε εἰς τὴν μητρόπολιν τοῦ νέου ἔτους, ‘‘come up to the metropolis at the New Year.” For κατ᾽ ἔτος, ‘‘ yearly,” as in Lk 2", cf. P Amh Il. 86" (a.p. 78) ds (sc. δραχμὰς) Kal ἀπίοδ]ώσω kar’ ἔτος ἐξενίαυτα, the yearly charge was to be paid annually, P Oxy IV. 725%* (a contract of apprenticeship—a.D. 183) ἀργήσει δὲ ὁ παῖς els λόγον ἑορτῶν κατ᾽ ἔτος ἡμέρας εἴκοσι, “the boy shall have 20 holidays in the year on account of festivals’ (Edd.): for καθ᾽ ἔτος see P Tebt II. 31125 (A.D. 134), 373!%14 (A D. 110-1), α΄ The aspirated form καθ᾽ éros is also fairly common, e.g. P Petr III. r9(c)3* (B.c. 224) where the words καθ᾽ éros have been added above the line, and the editor explains the form as due to false analogy with καθ᾽ ἡμέραν : see further Meyer ΟἿ. p- 326f., Proleg. p. 44. Ka’ ἕτος is read guater in P Ryl II. 166 (A.D. 26), and ἐφ᾽ ros in P Oxy X.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔτος (etos) — year.

ἔτος, εος, τό,

irregular dative ἔτῃ [Refs]:—year, τῶν προτέρων ἐτέων in bygone years, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τόδ᾽ ἐεικοστὸν ἔ. ἐστὶν ἐξ οὗ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἐνιαυτῶν, see at {ἐνιαυτό; ἑκάστου ἔτους} [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δι᾽ ἔτους πέμπτου every fifth year, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ ἔ. every year, [NT+5th c.BC+]; ἔ. εἰς ἔ. year after year, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δι᾽ ἔτους annually, [LXX+3rd c.BC+]; παρὰ ἔ. every other year, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]yearly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τρίτῳ ἔτεϊ τούτων in the third year after this, [Refs]; frequently in accusative, ἔ. τόδ᾽ ἤδη δέκατον.. βόσκων now for these ten years, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a person's age, γεγονὼς ἔτη τρία ἀπολείποντα τῶν ἑκατόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; without γεγονώς, τοὺς ὑπὲρ τετταράκοντα ἔτη [Refs], etc.: in genitive, ἐπειδὰν ἐτῶν ᾖ τις τριάκοντα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μυρίων ἐτῶν within a period of [Refs]years…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔτος

etos

apparently a primary word; a year:--year.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔτος, ους, τό

n.n.

a year

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔτος etos 49x

a year, Lk. 2:41; 3:23

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔτος ἔτος, εος, a year, Hom., etc.; τῶν προτέρων ἐτέων in bygone years, Il.; ἑκάστου ἔτους every year, Plat.; ἀνὰ πᾶν ἔτος Anth.; ἀνὰ πέντε ἔτεα every five years, Hdt.; δι᾽ ἔτους πέμπτου every fifth year, Ar.; κατὰ ἔτος every year, Thuc.; ἔτος εἰς ἔτος year after year, Soph.; in acc., ἔτος τόδ᾽ ἤδη δέκατον now for these ten years, id. Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPN — Noun · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- The sun and moon appointed to mark out

Ge 1:14

- Early computation of time by

Ge 5:3

- DIVIDED INTO

. Seasons

Ge 8:22

. Months

Ge 7:11; 1Ch 27:1

. Weeks

Da 9:27; Lu 18:12

. Days

Ge 25:7; Es 9:27

- Length of, during the patriarchal age

Ge 7:11; 8:13; 7:24; 8:3

- Commencement of, changed after the exodus

Ex 12:2

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
90%years
years90% · 43×year6% · 3×than years2% · 1×years?2% · 1×

48 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial76%subject14%predicate8%object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 49 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
χίλιοιa thousand
Article theὡςas, like as, howκαίand, even, also,
δώδεκαIndec
αἱμορροέωI suffer from a αἷμαblood
ἐπί
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaγίνομαιI come into bein
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
αὐτός
τρεῖςthree
ὁράωI see, look uponμετά
ἔτοςyears49×
what comes after →
δώδεκαIndec
καίand, even, also,ἀναβαίνωI go up, mount, ὅστις
τεσσεράκονταIndec
ὁράωI see, look uponἐν
δέbut, on the other ha
πεντεκαιδέκατοςfifteenthπολύςmuch, many, ofte
τετρακόσιοιfour hundred
καίand, even, also,
προσέρχομαιI come near, consent
ὄπισθενfrom behind, aft

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔτος · 49× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Revelation Galatians Hebrews John 2 Peter Mark 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians Matthew Romans
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 309 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 104c. AD 40

Παῖς μὲν ἄνηβος ἐὼν ἔτι νήπιος ἕρκος ὀδόντων φύσας ἐκβάλλει πρῶτον ἐν ἕπτ’ ἔτεσιν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περιέχει ἡ βίβλος χρόνον ἐτῶν ὡς Ἰώσηπος ͵γη, Ἑβραῖοι ͵αωοβ, Εὐσέβιος ͵γυνθ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 10.6c. AD 100

οὐ μὴ γένῃ, φησίν, παιδοφθόρος οὐδὲ ὁμοιωθήσῃ τοῖς τοιούτοις, ὅτι ὁ λαγωὸς κατ̓ ἐνιαυτὸν πλεονεκτεῖ τὴν ἀφόδευσιν: ὅσα γὰρ ἔτη ζῇ, τοσαύτας ἔχει τρύπας.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Νεχούτης Σχώτου τοῦ Φιμήνιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ὠνή. ἀπέδοτο Πανοβχοῦνις Παοῦτος Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ξ μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
ὄνταeimi as being G1510 Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · singular · masculine
2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.
Tyndale gloss
to be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-ASM — Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-ASM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
26%is
is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς
οὗτος
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god
ἐγώ
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά
σύ
ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
εἰμίas being2457×
what comes after →
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegγάρfor
ἐν
Article theσύαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t
ἐγώ
εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
σεsu you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · accusative · singular
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Amplified meaning
as a judge, with authority
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2AS — Personal pronoun · second person · accusative · singular
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2AS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Accusative Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύyou2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
κριτὴνkritēs judge G2923 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
19× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A judge is someone who makes fair decisions, like the judges mentioned in Matthew 5:25 and Luke 12:14. God and Jesus are also referred to as judges in the Bible.
Amplified meaning
one who makes fair decisions, an umpire
Tyndale gloss
judge
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κριτής is built from the verb κρίνω, meaning 'to judge.' It refers to a judge or magistrate, covering various contexts such as a Roman procurator, God, or Christ as judges, and even leaders in Israel. The New Testament uses it in verses like Matthew 5:25 and James 4:11. Moulton & Milligan note its technical use in political contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κριτής, -οῦ, ὁ

(< κρίνω),

[in LXX chiefly for שֹׁפַט;]

a judge: Mt 5:25, Lk 12:14, 58 18:2; τ. ἀδικίας, Lk 18:6; c. gen. rei (obj.), Ac 18:15, Ja 4:11; (qual.), διαλογισμῶν πονηρῶν, Ja 2:4; of a Roman procurator, Ac 24:10; of God, He 12:23, Ja 4:12; Christ, Ac 10:42, II Ti 4:8, Ja 5:9; of those whose conduct is made a standard for judging, Mt 12:27, Lk 11:19; in the OT sense (Jg 2:16, Ru 1:1, al), of a ruler in Israel,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κριτής, -0v, ὁ, (κρίνω), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], Sept. chiefly for wav; a judge; 1. univ. one who passes, or arrogates to himself, judgment on anything: w. gen. of the object, Jas. iv. 11; w. gen. of quality (see διαλογισμός, 1), Jas. ii. 4; in a forensic sense, of the one who tries and decides a case [cf. δικαστής, fin.]: Mt. v. 25; Lk. xii. 14 LT Tr WH, 58; [xviii. 2]; w. gen. of quality [cf. B. § 132, 10; W. § 34, 3b.], τῆς ἀδικίας, Lk. xviii. 6; w. gen. of the object (a thing), an arbiter, Acts xviii. 15; of a Roman procurator administering justice, Acts xxiv. 10; of God passing judgment on the character and deeds of men, and rewarding accordingly, Heb. xii. 23; Jas. iv. 12; also of Christ returning to sit in judgment, Acts x. 42; 2 Tim. iv. 8; Jas. v. 9; in a peculiar sense, of a person whose conduct is made the standard for judging another and convicting him of wrong: w.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κριτής is used of one designated by the Prefect to the office of “judge,’’ as in P Oxy IX. 1195! (A.D. 135) ᾿Απολλωνίωι κριτῆι δοθέντι ὑπὸ Ilerpwvfov Μαμερτείνου τοῦ κρατίστου ἡγεμόνος : it is also applied to this same Prefect himself in z6. IV. 726° (A.D. 135). Cf. also 24. I. 975 (A.D. 115-6) ἐπί τε πάσης ἐξουσίας καί παντὸς κριτοῦ. For the “ technical-political” sense of the word, as frequently in the LXX, Wackernagel (Hellenzstica, p. 11) cites OGIS 4671° éntλεκτον κριτὴν ἐκ τῶν ἐν Ῥώμῃ δεκουριῶν, compared with 76. 499° τῶν ἐκλέκτων ἐν Ρώμῃ δικαστῶν, both ii/a.D. inserr. from Asia Minor.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κριτής (kritēs) — judge.

κρῐτ-ής, οῦ, ὁ,

vocative [Refs 6th c.BC+]: (κρίνω):—judge, umpire, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τῶν ἀληθῶν, opposed to δοξαστής, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; at Athens, usually of the judges in the poetic contests, [LXX+5th c.BC+] Latin judex datus, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] judex selectus, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. κ. ἐνυπνίων interpreter of dreams, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. κριτάς· ὀδόντας, [Refs 5th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

κριτής

krites

from 2919; a judge (genitive case or specially):--judge.

see GREEK for 2919

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κριτής, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a judge

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κριτής kritēs 19x

a judge, Mt. 5:25; from the Hebrew, a magistrate, ruler, Acts 13:20; 24:10

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κριτής κρι^τής, οῦ, κρίνω a decider, judge, umpire, Hdt., Thuc.:—at Athens, of the judges in the poetic contests, Ar.

κρ. ἐνυπνίων an interpreter of dreams, Aesch.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

juj (shopheT; New Testament dikastes, krites): In the early patriarchal times the heads of families and the elders of the tribes were the judges (compare Ge 38:24), and their authority was based on custom. In the wilderness Moses alone was the judge until Jethro suggested a scheme of devolution. On his advice Moses divided the people into groups of thousands, hundreds, fifties, and tens, and over each group a wise and good man was set as a judge. Thereafter only the most important cases were brought before Moses (Ex 18:13-26; De 1:9-17). This arrangement ceased to be practicable when the children of Israel settled down in Canaan. Although David took counsel with the heads of thousands and hundreds (

Judge

(Heb. shophet, pl. shophetim), properly a magistrate or ruler, rather than one who judges in the sense of trying a cause. This is the name given to those rulers who presided over the affairs of the Israelites during the interval between the death of Joshua and the accession of Saul (Judg. 2:18), a period of general anarchy and confusion. “The office of judges or regents was held during life, but it was not hereditary, neither could they appoint their successors. Their authority was limited by the law alone, and in doubtful cases they were directed to consult the divine King through the priest by Urim and Thummim (Num. 27:21). Their authority extended only over those tribes by whom they had been elected or acknowledged. There was no income attached to their office, and they…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Appointed by the Persians Ezr 7:25

→ Kings and other rulers as 2Sa 8:15; 15:2; 1Ki 3:16-28; 10:9; 2Ki 8:1-6; Ps 72:1-4; Mt 27:11-26; Ac 23:34,35; 24; 25:11,12

→ Priests and Levites as De 17:9; 2Ch 19:8; Eze 44:23,24; Mt 26:57-62

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%judge
judge79% · 15×judges21% · 4×

19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject37%predicate37%adverbial11%indirect object5%second object5%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ἀντίδικοςan opponent, advπρός
αὐτός
οὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
σύ
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaνομοθέτηςa law-giver, leg
καθίστημιI set, establish, ap
ἐγώ
κριτήςjudge19×
what comes after →
Article the
ὑπηρέτηςa servant, an atἀδικίαunrighteousnessἔθνοςa race, people,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the
εἰμίI am, exist
σύ
Disj
μεριστήςa divider, distr
σύ
παραδίδωμιI hand over, del

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκριτής · 19× in the New Testament
Luke Acts James Matthew 2 Timothy Hebrews
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 35 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Polycarp The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Migration of Abraham 115c. AD 40

ἀλλ’ ὁ τῶν ἐν ψυχῇ ταμιευομένων ἐπίσκοπος ἰδών, ᾧ κατιδεῖν ἔξεστι μόνῳ, τὰ ἀθέατα γενέσει, τὴν καταδικάζουσαν ἀπὸ τούτων ψῆφον ἤνεγκε, μάρτυς ἀψευδέστατος ὁμοῦ καὶ κριτὴς ἀδέκαστος ὁ αὐτὸς ὤν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.318c. AD 75–95

ὑπὲρ δὲ τῆς λείας ἧς ἐγκαλεῖς, φησίν, ἀδικῶν αὐτὸς ἂν εὑρεθείης ἐπʼ ἄλλῳ κριτῇ·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 4.10c. AD 96

ζῆλος φυγεῖν ἠνάγκασεν Μωϋσῆν ἀπὸ προσώπου Φαραὼ βασιλέως Αἰγύπτου ἐν τῷ ἀκοῦσαι αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὁμοφύλου: Τίς σε κατέστησεν κριτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν ἐφ̓ ἡμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 1st c. BC
BGU 4 1138Alexandria20 BC

τῆς γενηθείσης μοι ἀντικαταστάσεως πρὸς Ἰσχυρίωνα προχειροφόρον τρ … ο ἐπιστρατηγ καὶ δέδωκας ἡμῖν κριτὴν Κάσιον, καὶ ἐκ τῶν ὑποδειχθέντων ὑπʼ ἐμοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ Κασίου ἐπὶ παρόντος καὶ τοῦ

P.Oxy. 49 3464OxyrhynchosAD 54–AD 60

ἀνδρῶν ἑτέρων τῆς Μαρωνίδος ὑπαρχόντων, ἔσχον ὑπὲρ ἁπάντων ἀπὸ Λουκίου Λουσίου Γέτα τοῦ προηγεμονεύσαντος κριτὴν Γάϊον Ἰούλιον Ἰόλλαν ἱερέα καὶ γυμνασίαρχον Ἀλεξανδρείας, ὃς διακούσας ἐμοῦ τε καὶ τῶν ἄλλων

P.Oxy. 36 2754OxyrhynchosAD 111

κωλύω γείνεσθαι, μὴ νῦν πρῶτον ἀπαγορεύων τὸ κακούργημα τοῦτο. οἱ φίλους ἡγεμονικοὺς λαβόντες πρότερον κριτὰς καὶ μὴ ἀπαρτισθέντες ἐντυνχανετωσαν Ἰουλίῳ Μαξίμῳ τῷ ἀρχιστάτορι φίλωι, οἱ δʼ ἄλλοι πρὸς τοὺς

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
τῷho <the> G3588 Article · dative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSN — Article · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
ἔθνειethnos to nation G1484 Noun · dative · singular · neuter
162× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means a nation or people, often referring to non-Jewish people. In Matthew 21:43 and Acts 10:35, it describes the Gentiles or nations.
Amplified meaning
the Jewish people, a specific ethnic group
Tyndale gloss
Gentiles
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔθνος (i.e., *ethnos*) refers to a multitude or a nation, often distinguished from the Jewish people. It can denote a company of individuals or animals and is frequently used in the New Testament to refer to Gentiles or non-Jews. The term appears in various contexts, including Acts and Matthew, where it highlights the distinction between Jews and other nations.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔθνος, -ους, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for עַם ,גּוֹי ;]

a multitude, a company, whether of beasts or men (Hom.).

a nation, people: Mt 21:43 24:7, Mk 13:8, Lk 22:25, Ac 10:35, al.; in sing., of the Jewish people, Lk 7:5 23:2, Jo 11:48, 50-53 18:35, Ac 10:22 24:3, 10 26:4 28:19.

In pl., as in OT, τὰ ἔ. (like Heb. הַגּוֹיִם), the nations, as distinct from Israel, Gentiles: Mt 4:15 6:32, Ac 26:17, Ro…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔθνος, -ους, τό; 1. a multitude (whether of men or of beasts) associated or living together ; a company, troop, swarm: ἔθνος ἑταίρων, ἔθνος ᾿Αχαιῶν, ἔθνος λαῶν, Hom. 1]. ; ἔθνος μελισσάων, 2,87; μυιάων ἔθνεα, ib. 469. 2. α multitude of individuals of the same nature or genus, (τὸ ἔθνος τὸ θῆλυ ἢ τὸ ἄρρεν, Xen. oec. 7, 26): πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων, the human race, Acts xvii. 26 [but this seems to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation: Mt. xxi. 43; Acts x. 35, ete.; ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος, Mt. xxiv. 7; ΜΚ. xiii. 8; οἱ ἄρχοντες, of βασιλεῖς τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mt. xx. 25; Lk. xxii. 25; used [in the sing.] of the Jewish people, Lk. vii. δ; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53; xviii. 35; Acts x. 22; xxiv. 2 (3), 10; xxvi. 4; xxviii. 19. 4. (ra) ἔθνη, like 0127 in the O. T., foreign nations not worshipping the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [ οἴ. Trench § xeviii.]: Mt. iv. 15 (Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔθνος. Hicks in CR i. p. 42f. has shown that ‘‘ Hellenic life found its normal type in the πόλις, and barbarians who lived κατὰ κώμας or in some less organised form were ἔθνη,᾽᾿ and that similarly in the LXX and NT ἔθνος ‘‘ describes the pagan world, outside the Jewish Church,’’ but occasionally stands for the λαός itself, as in Ac 107%, 2477 α΄. In an Impenial rescript of a.p. 198-201 we have a good example of the word = ‘‘ province’ —P Oxy VII. 1020° ᾧ ἡγούplevos] τοῦ ἔθνους τὸν ἀγῶνα τῆς ἀφέσεως ἐκδικ[ήσει, “the praefect of the province shall decide the suit for release” (Ed.): cf. P Strass I. 2219 (iii/A.p.) διατάξεις εἰσὶν τῶν κυρίων περὶ τῶν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν οἰκούντων, where the editor understands by ἔθνη, ‘“‘provinctae populé Romani,” and the exx. from Greek writers of this usage in Magie p. 59, dA7chzv i. p. 66: see also Deissmann Pax/, p. 100. In the edict regarding the aurum…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔθνος (ethnos) — Gentiles.

ἔθνος, εος, τό:

(ϝέθνος,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: - number of people living together, company, body of men, ἑτάρων ἔ., ἔ. ἑταίρων, band of comrades, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔθνος λαῶν host of men, [Refs]; of particular tribes, Αυκίων μέγα ἔ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of animals, ἔ. μελισσάων, ὀρνίθων, μυιάων, swarms, flocks, etc., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἀνέρων, γυναικῶν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. βρότεον, θνατόν, [Refs]; ἔ. τόδε, of the Erinyes, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. after [Refs 8th c.BC+], nation, people, τὸ Μηδικὸν ἔ. (γένος being a subdivision of ἔθνος) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἠπειρογενές, μαχαιροφόρον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔθνος

ethnos

probably from 1486; a race (as of the same habit), i.e. a tribe;

specially, a foreign (non-Jewish) one (usually, by implication,

pagan):--Gentile, heathen, nation, people.

see GREEK for 1486

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔθνος, ους, τό

n.n.

a race, people, the Gentiles

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔθνος ethnos 162x

a multitude, company, Acts 17:26; 1 Pet. 2:9; Rev. 21:24; a nation, people, Mt. 20:25; 21:43; pl. ἔθνη, from the Hebrew, nations or people as distinguished from the Jews, the heathen, Gentiles, Mt. 4:15; 10:5; Lk. 2:32

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔθνος ἔθνος, εος, ἔθω a number of people accustomed to live together, a company, body of men, Il., etc.; ἔθνος λαῶν a host of men, id. Il.; also of animals, swarms, flocks, id. Il., Soph.

after Hom., a nation, people, Hdt., etc.:—in NTest. τὰ ἔθνη the nations, Gentiles, i. e. all but Jews and Christians.

a special class of men, a caste, tribe, Plat., Xen.

sex, id. Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSN — Noun · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ Sins of Isa 30:1,2

→ Chastised Isa 14:26,27; Jer 5:29; 18:6-10; 25:12-33; Eze 2:3-5; 39:23,24; Da 7:9-12; 9:3-16; Ho 7:12; Joe 1:1-20; Am 9:9; Zep 3:6,8

→ Perish Ps 9:17; Isa 60:12

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
55%gentiles
gentiles55% · 91×nations20% · 33×nation18% · 30×other renderings4% · 6×other renderings2% · 4×

164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial36%subject27%object15%indirect object11%predicate9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 162 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,ἐν
καίand, even, also, nam
λαόςa people, the crγλῶσσαthe tongue, a laοὐχίIrg
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἀπόἐνεἷςone
ἐκ
λαμβάνωI receive, takeArticle theκαίand, even, also,
ἐπί
ἔθνοςa race, people,
ἔθνοςto nation162×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
βασιλείαkingship, sovereArticle theλαόςa people, the cr
Article the
μήNegθεόςGod, a godκόσμοςthe world, unive
ἐπί
ἔθνοςa race, people, ὅςὅσος
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,ἐπιστέλλωI write, send byπαραγίνομαιI appear, come,
εἰς
Article theὅςαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔθνος · 162× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Revelation Matthew Luke Galatians Mark Ephesians John 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 509 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.88c. AD 40

ἐπειδὴ γὰρ πορεύεται ἡ ὑπομονητικὴ ψυχὴ Ῥεβέκκα πυθέσθαι παρὰ θεοῦ, ἀποκρίνεται αὐτῇ, ὅτι „δύο ἔθνη ἐν τῇ γαστρί σού ἐστι, καὶ δύο λαοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας σου διασταλήσονται, καὶ λαὸς λαοῦ ὑπερέξει, καὶ ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 9.5c. AD 100

λάβε πάλιν: Ἰδού, λέγει κύριος, πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἀπερίτμητα ἀκροβυστίαν, ὁ δὲ λαὸς οὗτος ἀπερίτμητος καρδίας.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Diog. 23AD 185–AD 186

ὁ κύριος ἡμῶν … τοῦτο τὸ ἔθνος … λομενον πυ … εισθαι πρ … … ἐντολῆς … … εἰδῶσι ἔτους κϛ

P.Sijp. 58AD 101–AD 300

ἀδελφῇ … χαίρειν. … μικρὸν παιδίον … ς φοινίκων … αν αὐτὸν ὡς … ἔθνη κoινὰν … μηχανῶν ἢ ἐρι… ἐπεὶ γὰρ χρείαν σου ἔχω … ἀσπάσασθαι. ἀπο

P.Col. 6 123Tebtynis? (Arsinoites)AD 200

ἀπολαβεῖν σε τὴν νομὴν τῶν χωρὶς συνβάσεως κατεχομένων πρὸς βίαν χωρίων ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ ἔθνους κελεύσει … … θαλγη Ἀμβρήλου διὰ Ἀβδομάνχου υἱοῦ. ἀργύριον γυναῖκες δανίζεσθαι καὶ ὑπὲρ ἄλλων

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
τούτῳohutos this G3778 Demonstrative pronoun · dative · singular · neuter
1,388× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This refers to a specific person or thing, like when Jesus says 'this is my body' in Matthew 26:26 and Mark 14:22.
Tyndale gloss
this/he/she/it
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὗτος (i.e., *houtos*) is a demonstrative pronoun meaning 'this' or 'this one.' It is used to refer to something nearby or recently mentioned, often with a connotation of contempt in certain contexts. In the New Testament, it appears in various forms, such as in Matthew 3:17 and John 1:15, and can also serve to emphasize or clarify a subject.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, gen., τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου,

[in LXX chiefly for זֶה, זֹאת;]

demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille),

this;

as subst., this one, he;

absol.: Mt 3:17, Mk 9:7, Lk 7:44, 45, Jo 1:15, Ac 2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mt 13:55, 56, Mk 6:2, 3, Jo 6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mk 1:38, Ro 14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jo 5:1), Jo 2:12 11:7, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, demonstrative pron. [ef. Curtius p. 543], Hebr. 71, ΠΝ, this; used I. absolutely. 1. a. this one, visibly present here: Mt. iii. 17; xvii.5; Mk. ix. 7; Lk. vii. 44 sq.; ix. 35; 2 Pet.i.17. Mt.ix.3; xxi. 38; Mk. xiv. 69; Lk. 11. 34; xxiii. 2; Jn. i. 15, 30; vii. 25; ix. 8 54. 19; xviii. 21,50; xxi. 21; Actsii. 15; iv. 10; ix. 21; according to the nature and character of the person or thing mentioned, it is used with a suggestion —either of contempt, as Mt. xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 2 sq.: Lk. v. 21; vii. 39,49; Jn. vi. 42,52; vii. 15; or of admiration, Mt. xxi. 11; Actsix.21; οἵ, Wahl, Clavis apocryphor. V. T. p- 370% b. it refers to a subject immediately preceding, the one just named: Lk. i. 32; ii. 37 [RGL]; Jn. i. 2; vi. 71; 2 Tim. iii. 6,8, ete.; at the beginning of a narrative about one already mentioned, Mt. iii. 3; Lk. xvi. 1; Jn. i. 41 (42); ili. 2; xii. 21; xxi.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οὗτος. A few of the prepositional phrases with this common demonstrative pron. may be illustrated διὰ τοῦτο, ‘on this account,” cf. P Ryl IT. 845 (a.p. 146) τὴν ἄνεσιν τὴν διὰ τοῦτο γενομένην τῶν ὑπαρχόντων, “the ensuing remission “ OUT@S, O’.TO@ of the lands’ (Edd.): ἐκ τούτου, ‘for this reason,’’ Jn 6° cf. 26. 81°4 (c, A.D, 104) ἐκ τούτου δὲ [φανεῖρόν ἐστιν [καὶ] μηδένα χρῇζειν, “‘it is evident from this that nobody wants it’’ (Edd.), BGU 11. 423!7 (ason to his father—ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 91) με ἐπαίδευσας καλῶς, Kal ἐκ τούτου ἐλπίζω ταχὺ προκόσί-- par τῶν θε[ῶ]ν θελόντων, “you have brought me up well, and for this reason I hope to be quickly promoted, if the gods will”: τούτου ἕνεκα, ‘‘ for this purpose,” cf. P Oxy I. 1138 (ii/a.p.) ἐὰν δ᾽ dpa μή, ; ἅμα τῷ vide μου ἐξέρχομαι τούτου ἕνεκα, “otherwise I and my son will come for this purpose’’ (Edd.): ἐπὶ τούτων, ““upon this,” ‘in…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὗτος (ohutos) — this/he/she/it.

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο,

genitive τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, etc.: the dual feminine never in Attic dialect, see ὁ, ἡ, τό, [near the start]:—demonstrative pronoun, this, common from [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A ORIGIN and FORMS: οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο probably arose from a reduplication of the demonstrative ὁ, ἡ, τό with insertion of -υ- (= Sanskrit Particle u), e.g. ταῦτα from τα-υ-τα: Doric dialect genitive singular feminine τούτας [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc., the latter is uncertain in [Refs 5th c.BC+], as genitive singular neuter οὕτω [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; accusative singular feminine οὕταν [Refs 6th c.BC+] —In _Attic dialect_ οὗτος was frequently strengthened by the _demonstrative_ -ί, οὑτοσί, αὑτηί, τουτί, _genitive_ τουτουί, _dative_ τουτῳί, _accusative_ τουτονί; plural nominative οὑτοιί, neuter ταυτί, etc., this man here…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο

Dem.pr.

this, he, she, it

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὗτος houtos 1x

this, this person or thing, Mt. 3:3, 9, 17; 8:9; 10:2; 24:34, et al. freq.; used by way of contempt, this fellow, Mt. 13:55; 27:47; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, this very thing, this same thing, 2 Cor. 2:3; 7:11; εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο, and elliptically, αὐτὸ τοῦτο, for this same purpose, on this account, Eph. 6:18, 22; 2 Pet. 1:5; καὶ οὗτος, and moreover, Lk. 7:12; 16:1; 20:30; καὶ τοῦτο, and that too, 1 Cor. 6:6, 8; tοῦτο μὲν ... τοῦτο δέ, partly ... partly, Heb.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

οὗτος demonstr. Pron. this, Lat. hic, to designate the nearer of two things, opp. to ἐκεῖνος, the more remote (cf. ὅδε), Hom., etc.

when, of two things, one precedes and the other follows, ὅδε generally refers to what follows, οὗτος to what precedes, Soph., etc.

so also, οὗτος is used emphat., generally in contempt, while ἐκεῖνος (like Lat. ille) denotes praise, ὁ πάντ᾽ ἄναλκις οὗτος, i. e. Aegisthus, id. Soph.; οὗτος ἀνήρ Plat.; τούτους τοὺς συκοφάντας id. Plat.

in attic law-language, οὗτος is commonly applied to the opponent, whether plaintiff or defendant, whereas in Lat. hic was the client, iste the opponent, Dem.

often much like an adv., in local sense (cf. ὅδε init.), τίς δ᾽ οὗτος κατὰ νῆας ἔρχεαι; who art thou here that comest . . ? Il.; often in attic, τίς οὑτοσί; who's this…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Dem-DSN — Demonstrative pronoun · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

D-DSN Part of Speech: Demonstrative pronoun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
55%this
this55% · 781×these things16% · 231×these14% · 196×he3% · 49×other renderings5% · 73×other renderings7% · 94×

1,424 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 49 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject36%object32%adverbial26%predicate4%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,388 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςδέbut, on the otheλέγωI say, speak
διά
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist
ἐν
καίand, even, also,γάρforοὔτεNeg
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakεἰςγάρfor
ὅτιthat, since, because
λέγωI say, speakοἶδαI know, rememberγράφωI write
οὗτοςthis1388×
what comes after →
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, θεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅς
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theκατακρίνωI condemnεἰμίI am, exist
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakεἰμίI am, existαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
σύArticle theαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὗτος · 1,388× in the New Testament
John Acts Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 John 2 Peter

29 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 2,054 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ἀλλ’ ὅ γε μέγας Μωυσῆς ἀλλοτριώτατον τοῦ ὁρατοῦ νομίσας εἶναι τὸ ἀγένητον — πᾶν γὰρ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἐν γενέσει καὶ μεταβολαῖς οὐδέποτε κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὄν — τῷ μὲν ἀοράτῳ καὶ νοητῷ προσένειμεν ὡς ἀδελφὸν καὶ συγγενὲς ἀιδιότητα, τῷ δ’ αἰσθητῷ γένεσιν οἰκεῖον…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
ἐπιστάμενοςepistamai knowing [these] G1987 Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
15× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To know or understand means to have knowledge or insight about something, as seen in Acts 19:15 and Mark 14:68. This term is used to describe spiritual understanding and awareness. It involves having a deep understanding of God's will and plans.
Amplified meaning
being aware, having understanding
Tyndale gloss
to know/understand
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπίσταμαι (i.e., *epistamai*) is likely derived from an older form of ἐφίστημι. It means to know, understand, or be acquainted with something, often used in contexts of comprehension or skill. In the New Testament, it appears in verses like Acts 19:15 and 1 Timothy 6:4. The entries suggest a range of meanings, including being versed in a subject or knowing how to do something.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπίσταμαι

(prob. an old mid, of ἐφίστημι, q.v.),

[in LXX chiefly for יָדַע ;]

to know, know of, understand: c. acc pers., Ac 19:15; c. ptcp., ib. 24:10; c. acc rei, Mk 14:68, Ac 18:25, I Ti 6:4, Ja 4:14, Ju 10; seq. περί, Ac 26:26; ὅτι, ib. 15:7 19:25 22:19; ὡς, ib. 10:28; πῶς, ib. 20:18; ποῦ, He 11:8.†

SYN: γινώσκω (q.v.), οἶδα

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπίσταμαι (seems to be the Ionic form of the Mid. of ἐφίστημι. Isocrates, Aristot., al., also use ἐπιστῆσαι τὴν διάνοιαν, τὸν νοῦν, ἑαυτόν for to put one’s attention on, fix one’s thoughts on; indeed, the simple ἐπιστῆσαι is used in the same sense, by an ellipsis analogous to that of τὸν νοῦν with the verbs προσέχειν, ἐπέχειν, and of τὴν ὄψιν with προσβάλλειν; see Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 281 sq. Hence ἐπίσταμαι is prop. to turn one’s self or one’s mind to, put one’s thought upon a thing); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for yt}; (cf. Germ. sich worauf verstehen) ; a. to be acquainted with: ri, Acts xviii. 25; Jas. iv. 14; Jude 10; τινά, Acts xix. 15; with reference to what is said or is to be interpreted, to understand: Mk. xiv. 68; 1 Tim. vi. 4. b. to know: περί twos, Acts xxvi. 26; foll.-by an ace. with a ptep. Acts xxiv. 10 [W. 346 (324); B. 301 (258)]; foll. by ὅτι, Acts xv. 7; xix. 25…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπίσταμαι. For this verb, which is common in Ac, it is sufficient to cite P HibrI. 405 (8.6. 261) ἐπίστασο μέντον (/. -οι) ἀκριβῶς, ‘*you must clearly understand,” P Tebt II. 408% (A.D. 3) ἐπιστάμενος πῶς σε τίθεμαι Ke φιλώ, ‘since you know how I esteem and love you’’ (Edd.), P Ryl 11. 243" (ii/aA.p.) Kal viv ἐπιστάμεθά cov τὸ σπουδαῖον, P Leid W**9 (ii/ili A.D.) ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε (a god) . . ὃν οὐδεὶς ἐπίσταται, ὃν οἱ (θεοί or ἄγγελοι) προσκυνοῦσιν, P Oxy VIIL. 11214 (A.D. 295) τίνι ἐπαγόμενοι οὐκ ἐπίσταμαι, ‘on what inducement I cannot tell’’ (Ed.), and the common phrase regarding an illiterate person διὰ τὸ μὴ ἐπίστασθαι γράμματα, as in P Ryl II. 731 (B.c. 33-30): cf. P Tebt II. 2915} (A.D. 162) ἀπΊ]όδειξιν δοὺς τοῦ ἐπίστασθαι [ἱε]ρατικὰ [kal] Αἰγύπτια γράμ[ματ]α. See also Sy// 726% (B.c. 301-0) εἰδότες ὅτι ἐπίστανται χάριτας ἀποδιδόναι of θιασῶται. The acc. of the person (as in Ac…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπίσταμαι (epistamai) — to know/understand.

ἐπίστᾰμαι, 2

person -ασαι[Refs 6th c.BC+], contraction ἐπίστω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive Ionic dialect ἐπιστέωμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+], Attic dialect ἐπίστωμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: imperfect ἠπιστάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἠπιστέατο or ἐπιστέατο [Refs]: future ἐπιστήσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἠπιστήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. know how to do, be able to do, capable of doing, c.infinitive, οὐδέ οἱ ὀστέ᾽ ἐπιστήσονται Ἀχαιοὶ ἀλλέξαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and of artistic skill, ὃς χερσὶν ἐπίστατο δαίδαλα πάντα τεύχειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently in Trag. and Attic dialect, οὔπω σωφρονεῖν ἐπίστασαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κιθαρίζειν οὐκ ἐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, σῷζ ὅπως ἐπίστασαι as best you can, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπίσταμαι

epistamai

apparently a middle voice of 2186 (with 3563 implied); to put the mind

upon, i.e. comprehend, or be acquainted with:--know, understand.

see GREEK for 2186

see GREEK for 3563

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπίσταμαι

v.

I know, understand

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπίσταμαι epistamai 14x

to be versed in, to be master of, 1 Tim. 6:4; to be acquainted with, Acts 18:25; 19:15; Jude 10: to know, Acts 10:28; to remember, comprehend, understand, Mk. 14:68

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπίσταμαι prob. = ἐφίσταμαι Dep.:

c. inf. to know how to do, to be able to do, capable of doing, Hom., attic

to be assured or believe that a thing is, Hdt.

c. acc. to understand a matter, know, be versed in or acquainted with, Hom., etc.:—after Hom. to know as a fact, know for certain, know well, Hdt., attic

rarely, to know a person, Eur.

c. part., to know that one is, has, etc., Hdt., attic

part. pres. ἐπιστάμενος, η, ον, is often also used as an adj. knowing, understanding, skilful, Hom.:—c. gen. skilled or versed in a thing, id. Hom.:—adv. ἐπισταμένως, skilfully, expertly, id. Hdt., Hes.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNP-NSM — Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
29%know
know29% · 4×knowing29% · 4×you know14% · 2×i am acquainted with7% · 1×understands7% · 1×they understand7% · 1×understand7% · 1×

14 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 15 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
σύ
αὐτόςἀδελφόςa brother
αὐτός
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastαἰφνίδιοςunexpected, sudd
οὔτεNeg
οἶδαI know, remember
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article the
ΠαῦλοςPaul
Article the
ἐπίσταμαιknowing [these]15×
what comes after →
ὅτιthat, since, because
ἀπόἐκἐγώ
σύ
τίςIrgδέbut, on the othe
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
ἀθέμιτοςillegal, unlawfu
μόνοςalone, but, only
Article the
ἀπό
πρῶτοςfirst, before

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπίσταμαι · 15× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy Hebrews James Jude Mark
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 40 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.88c. AD 40

ὁ γὰρ ζῳοπλάστης θεὸς ἐπίσταται τὰ ἑαυτοῦ καλῶς δημιουργήματα καὶ πρὶν αὐτὰ εἰς ἄκρον διατορεῦσαι, τάς τε δυνάμεις, αἷς αὖθις χρήσονται, καὶ συνόλως τὰ ἔργα τούτων καὶ πάθη.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.173c. AD 75–95

εἰ δέ τις ἢ θεασάμενος τὴν βοτάνην ἀμαθίᾳ τούτου ἀγνοεῖ τὴν φύσιν αὐτῆς ἢ τὴν κλῆσιν ἐπιστάμενος οὐκ ἰδὼν δʼ ἀναγνωρίσειε, τοῖς οὕτω δὴ ἔχουσι σημανῶ τὸν τρόπον·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
8th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Mich. 5 346 aArsinoitesAD 12–AD 13

ὁμολογῶ ἐπάναγκον ἐκδιδάξειν Ἑλένην παιδίσκην Ἡρακλήωνος Εἰρηναίου τὴν γερδιακὴν τέχνην καθʼ ἃ καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίσταμαι ἐπʼ ἔτη δύο καὶ μῆνας ἓξ ἀπὸ μηνὸς Φαρμοῦθι τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος δευτέρου καὶ τεσσαρακοστοῦ

P.Oxy. Hels. 29OxyrhynchosAD 54

αὐτῶι ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἡρᾶτος κατὰ τὴν γερδιακὴν τέχνην ἥνπερ καὶ αὐτὸς ἐκδιδάξει τοῦτον καθὼς ἐπίσταται, τοῦ παιδὸς τρεφομένου ἐπὶ τὸν προκίμενον χρόνον ὑπὸ τῆς Ἀπολλωνοῦτος ἀνθʼ ὧν χωρηγήσηι αὐτῆι

P.Tebt. 2 442 descr.Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 113

ὥστε μαθεῖν αὐτὸν Ἁρφαῆσιν τὴν γερδιακὴν τέχνην πᾶσαν ἐντελῆ ὡς καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ Ἥρων ἐπίσταται ἐπὶ ἔτη … ἀπὸ τῆς νεομηνίας τοῦ Χοιὰκ μηνὸς

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
εὐθύμωςeuthumos encouraging G2115 Adverb · comparative
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word describes someone who is encouraging and in good spirits, like the people in Acts 27:36 who were cheered up after a long ordeal. It's about being kind and uplifting to others.
Tyndale gloss
encouraging
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εὐθύμως (euthumos) is derived from roots meaning 'good' and 'spirit.' It generally conveys the idea of being cheerful or in good spirits. This term appears in Acts 27:36, where it reflects a sense of encouragement and good cheer. The lexicons note its use in various contexts, including literature and the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** εὔ-θυμος, -ον

[in LXX: II Mac 11:26 * ;]

kind (Hom.).

of good cheer (Æsch., al.): Ac 27:36.†

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εὔθυμος. P Oxy VI. 939! (iv/A.D.) ἵνα σε εὐθυμότερον καταστήσω, “that I may make you more cheerful”: cf. OGZS 669? (i/A.D.) ἵνα δὲ εὐθυμότεροι πάντα ἐλπίζητε κτλ. For the subst. see the fragmentary P Ryl II. 439 (iii/A.p.) where the desire is expressed—atOts per εὐθυμίας τὸ θεοφιλέστατόν σου πρόσωπον ἀπολαβεῖν.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εὔθυμος (euthumos) — encouraging.

εὔθῡμ-ος, ον,

kind, generous, ἄναξ [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. cheerful, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; συμπόσια εὔ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; of horses, spirited, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ εὔ., ={εὐθυμία}, [Refs 1st c.AD+]. adverb -μως cheerfully, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: comparative -ότερον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative -ότατα [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εὔθυμος

euthumos

from 2095 and 2372; in fine spirits, i.e. cheerful:--of good cheer,

the more cheerfully.

see GREEK for 2095

see GREEK for 2372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εὔθυμος, ον

Adj. & Comp.adv.

cheerful, having good courage

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εὔθυμος euthumos 1x

good cheer or courage, cheerful, Acts 27:36*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εὔθυμος εὔ-θυ_μος, ον bountiful, generous, Od.

of good cheer, cheerful, in good spirits, Xen.:—of horses, spirited, id. Xen.;—adv. -μως, cheerfully, Aesch., Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv-C — Adverb · comparative
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV-C ADVerb or adverb and particle combined Degree: Comparative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%encouraging
encouraging50% · 1×encouraged50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐπίσταμαιI know, understand
οὗτος
εὐθύμωςencouraging
what comes after →
Article the
περί
δέbut, on the other ha
γίνομαιI come into bein

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεὐθύμως · 2× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 10.174c. AD 75–95

οἱ δὲ αἰχμαλωτισθέντες ὑπὸ Ἰσμαήλου τὸν Ἰωάννην ἰδόντες καὶ τοὺς ἡγεμόνας εὐθύμως διετέθησαν βοήθειαν αὑτοῖς ἥκειν ὑπολαμβάνοντες, καὶ καταλιπόντες τὸν αἰχμαλωτίσαντα πρὸς Ἰωάννην ἀνεχώρησαν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD
BGU 7 1563Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 101–AD 200

τῶν εὐεργεσιῶν, ἃς ἔχει παρὰ τῶν Σεβαστῶν καὶ τοῦ τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν εὐσταθείᾳ διάγουσαν εὐθύμως ὑπηρετεῖν τῇ τε εὐθηνίᾳ καὶ τῇ μεγίστῃ τῶν νῦν καιρῶν εὐδαιμονίᾳ μὴ βαρυνομένην καιναῖς

P. Feste 81AlexandriaAD 301

σοι, ἀντίγραψον ἡμῖν περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας σου καὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν. παρόντες ἡμεῖς ἐνταῦθα εὔθυμοί ἐσμεν. πάντα δέ σοι δηλώσω τὰ συμβάντα μοι ἐν τῇ Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ. γενόμενοι τοιγαροῦν ἐνταῦθα

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
τὰho things, G3588 Article · accusative · plural · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APN — Article · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
things,19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
περὶperi concerning G4012 Preposition
333× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for about or around, used in various contexts such as place, cause, or time. It is often translated as 'about' or 'concerning' in the KJV, and appears in many passages, including Matthew 2:8 and John 16:26.
Tyndale gloss
about
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

One of the workhorse prepositions, standing 333 times. With the genitive it means about, concerning, with reference to. There is no hidden depth here, and it would be a mistake to look for one: its usefulness is that it marks the subject a sentence is circling. In this verse it points at what the earlier accounts were about.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

περί, prep. c. gen., acc. (in cl. also c. dat.; cf. M, Pr., 105f.),

with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides).

C. gen.,

of place, about (poët.).

Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mt 2:8, Mk 1:44, Lk 4:38, Jo 16:26, Ac 28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, c. gen., the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mk 5:27, Ac 1:3 28:15, Eph 6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, I Co 7:1, al.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

περί, (akin to πέρα. πέραν ; [Curtius § 359]), prep., joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the ace. (in class. Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person or thing relative to which an act or state is predicated is as it were encompassed by this act or state ; Lat. circum, circa; around, about. I. with the GeniTIve it denotes that around which an act or state revolves ; about, concerning, as touching, ete., (Lat. de, quod attinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter) [ef. W. 372 sq. (349)]. a. about, concerning, (Lat. de; in later Lat. also circa): after verbs of speaking, teaching, writing, ete., see under ἀναγγέλλω, ἀπαγγέλλω, ἀπολογοῦμαι, γογγύζω, γράφω, Sydow, διαβεβαιοῦμαι, διαγνωρίζω, διαλέγομαι, διδάσκω. διηγοῦμαι (Heb. xi. 32), διήγησις, εἶπον and προεῖπον, ἐπερωτάω and ἐρωτάω, κατηχέω, λαλέω, λέγω, λόγον αἰτέω. λόγον ἀποδίδωμι, λόγον δίδωμι, μαρτυρέω, μνεία, μνημονεύω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περί τροπὴν δέδωκα, “1 have entrusted to him the care of the whole matter” (Edd.), 7. XII. 15831! (ii/A.D.) γράψον μοι περὶ τῶν ὄντων, ‘ write me revarding the present state of affairs,” and ΒΟῸΣ II. 63218 (ii/a.p.) (= ZAZ, p. 173) ο[ὐ]χ ὀκνῶ σοι γράψαι περὶ THs] σωτηρίας pov καὶ τῶν ἐμῶν, “T am not delaying to write you regarding the health of me and mine.” In P Par 488 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski Zp.” p- 91) ἀκούσαντες... τὰ περὶ σου συνβεβηκότα, we have a mixture of ἀκούσαντες περὶ σοῦ and ἀκούσαντες τά (σοι) συνβεβηκότα ΠΕερί, ‘‘ with regard to,” at the beginning of a new clause (as in 1 Cor 71) may be illustrated from the headings in the Mysteries inscr, from Andania Sy// 653 (=*736)} (B.c. 91) περὶ ἱε]ρῶν Kal ἱερᾶν, α΄. See also P Eleph 134! (B.c, 223-2) περὶ δὲ τῶν εἴκοσι δραχμῶν οὔπω ἐκεκόμιστο Φίλων . περὶ δὲ τοῦ οἰναρίου ΤΙραξιάδης οὔπω εἰσελήλυθεν ἐξ ἀγροῦ, BGU IV. 1097° (time of…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περί (peri) — about.

περί,

Thess., Delph. περ [Refs 5th c.BC+], also Aeolic dialect, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+] V; Elean παρ [Refs]: preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative:—round about, all round (properly different from ἀμφί, on both sides). (Cogn. with Sanskrit pári 'round about'.)

__A WITH GENITIVE,

__A.I of Place, sometimes in Poets, round about, around, τετάνυστο π. σπείους ἡμερίς [Refs 8th c.BC+], on both sides, see at {περιβαίνω} [Refs]

__A.I.2 about near, π. σοῦ πάντα γένοιτο ῥόδα [Refs]

__A.II to denote the object about or for which one does something:

__A.II.1 with Verbs of fighting or contending, π. τινός for an object—from the notion of the thing's lying in the middle to be fought about, π. τῶνδε for these prizes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόλους καὶ μῆτιν ὕφαινον, ὥς τε π. ψυχῆς since it…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

περί

peri

from the base of 4008; properly, through (all over), i.e. around;

figuratively with respect to; used in various applications, of place,

cause or time (with the genitive case denoting the subject or occasion

or superlative point; with the accusative case the locality, circuit,

matter, circumstance or general period):--(there-)about, above,

against, at, on behalf of, X and his company, which concern, (as)

concerning, for, X how it will go with, ((there-, where-)) of, on,

over, pertaining (to), for sake, X (e-)state, (as) touching,

(where-)by (in), with. In comparative, it retains substantially the

same meaning of circuit (around), excess (beyond), or completeness

(through).

see GREEK for 4008

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περί

Prep.

about, concerning, around

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περί peri 333x

pr. of place, (1) gen., about, around; about, concerning, respecting, Mt. 2:8; 11:10; 22:31; Jn. 8:18; Rom. 8:3, et al. freq.; (2) acc., of place, about, around, round about, Mt. 3:4; Mk. 3:34; Lk. 13:8; οἱ περί τινα, the companions of a person, Lk. 22:49; a person and his companions, Acts 13:13; simply a person, Jn. 11:19; τὰ περί τινα, the condition, circumstances of any one, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

περί around, round about with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radical sense, round about, all round, whereas ἀμφί properly means on both sides.

WITH GENITIVE:

of Place, round about, around, Lat. circum, Od.

about, near, ἑσδόμεναι περὶ σεῖο Mosch.

Causal, to denote the object about or for which one does something:

with Verbs of fighting or contending, μάχεσθαι περὶ πτόλιος Il.; περὶ Πατρόκλοιο θανόντος id. Il.; so, τρέχειν περὶ ἑωυτοῦ, περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς Hdt.

about, for, on account of, μερμηρίζειν περί τινος Il.; φροντίζειν περί τινος Hdt.

with Verbs of hearing, knowing, speaking, about, concerning, Lat. circa, de, περὶ νόστου ἄκουσα Od., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

kon-surn'-ing:

The Revised Version (British and American) makes frequent changes, such as "for," "as for," "from," "about," for "concerning"; "concerning" instead of "for," "of," "over," "in," "against," etc. Some of the other changes are, "unto that which is good" for "concerning" (Ro 16:19), "concerning" instead of "because of" (Jer 23:9), for "the miracle of" (Mr 6:52); for "with" (Mr 10:41), for "of the Lord" (Ac 18:25), "concerning Jesus" (diferent text), "by way of disparagement" (2Co 11:21), instead of "concerning reproach"; "Why askest thou me concerning…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
59%concerning
concerning59% · 199×about16% · 55×for13% · 45×around6% · 19×of3% · 9×other renderings3% · 9×

336 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial86%object8%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 333 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,ἀκούωI hear, listen
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakλαλέωI speak, sayἐρωτάωI ask, question,
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἁμαρτίαa sinἀλλάbut, except
μαρτυρέωI witness, testify
Article theἐγώἵναin order that, s
σύ
μέλειit is a care, itγράφωI writeΦαρισαῖοςa Pharisee
περίconcerning333×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusβασιλείαkingship, sovereτράχηλοςthe neck
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becοὐαίindcl
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,ἵναin order that, sArticle the
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becἀδελφόςa brotherArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ὅςArticle theοὗτος

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπερί · 333× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Matthew Hebrews Mark 1 Corinthians 1 John 1 Thessalonians Romans 1 Peter Jude

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 297 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

περιέχει γὰρ τὸν νοητὸν κόσμον ἐξαίρετον, ὡς ὁ περὶ αὐτῆς λόγος μηνύει.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Ψενενοῦπιν ἐπὶ τὸν Ἁρσιῆσιν μήτʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ διασαφουμένου μέρους γῆς τρόπῳ μηδενί. εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποτεισάτω Ἁρσιήσει ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα χαλκοῦ

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

νδ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀδύνατος ὄμμασι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι περὶ Πάθυριν γῆν ἤπειρον σιτοφόρον ἀρουρῶν … ἧς γείτονες νότουπλατεῖαὁδός, βορρᾶ … περίχωμα … προπεπρα

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
ἐμαυτοῦemautou myself G1473 Reflexive pronoun · first person · genitive · singular · masculine
2,567× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a pronoun meaning I or me, used by the speaker to refer to themselves. It is often used in the Bible to emphasize the speaker's identity.
Tyndale gloss
I/we
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The first-person pronoun. A Greek verb already carries its person in the ending, so the pronoun is usually present for emphasis. Luke puts himself inside the “us” among whom these things were fulfilled: he writes as one of the people the events happened to, not as an observer standing outside them.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐγώ (egō) — I/we.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

ego

a primary pronoun of the first person I (only expressed when

emphatic):--I, me. For the other cases and the plural see 1691, 1698,

1700, 2248, 2249, 2254, 2257, etc.

see GREEK for 1691

see GREEK for 1698

see GREEK for 1700

see GREEK for 2248

see GREEK for 2249

see GREEK for 2254

see GREEK for 2257

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐγώ

Pers.pr.

I

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐγώ

pron. of the first person, Lat ego

epic ἐγών before vowels

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
F-1GSM — Reflexive pronoun · first person · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

F-1GSM Part of Speech: reFlexive pronoun Person: first Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
47%i myself
i myself47% · 406×me myself21% · 180×me13% · 114×myself4% · 36×mine4% · 36×my3% · 26×i myself also3% · 26×other renderings5% · 42×

866 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 25 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject30%object26%adverbial26%indirect object10%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,567 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
πατήρfather, Father, ance
Article theθεόςGod, a godκαίand, even, also,
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
Article theναίDisjδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
μένωI remain, abideεἰμίI am, existπατήρfather, Father,
καίand, even, also, nam
ὡςas, like as, howαὐτόςοὕτωthus, so, in thi
δίδωμιI offer, give
ὅςArticle theαὐτός
ἐγώmyself2567×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godπατήρfather, Father, ἐν
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theσύοὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,σύ
ἐν
Article theΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
οὐNegλέγωI say, speakArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐγώ · 2,567× in the New Testament
John Acts Luke Matthew 2 Corinthians Romans Mark 1 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews Galatians Philippians

18 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 853 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 17c. AD 40

ᾗ δὲ συνέστηκεν, εἰσόμεθα παρακολουθήσαντες εἰκόνι τινὶ τῶν παρ’ ἡμῖν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

συνγενόμενοι Ὥρωι Ψεν … λειτουργῶι μέχρι τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

σφραγίδων, ἧς ἐτελειώθη ὠνῆς ἀποστασίου ἐν τῷ ιδ ἔτει Φαῶφι ι εἰς τὸ ἐνλιπὸν μοι ἄπρατον γῆς ἀρουρῶν γ, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Κολλούθην μήδʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ

P.Cair. Goodspeed 9Pathyris100 BC–99 BC

παρὰ Πατῆτος τοῦ Πανεβχώνιος. ἐκμισθωθείσης μοι τῆς νήσου καλουμένης Περχμασσινηιτ εἰς τὸ ιϛ ἔτος πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα πέντε γίνονται πυροῦ

Answered then <the> Paul, when was signalling to him the governor to speak: For many years as being you judge <the> to nation this knowing [these] encouraging things, concerning myself I present a defense;
ἀπολογοῦμαι·apologeomai I present a defense; G626 Verb · present · no voice stated · indicative · first person · singular
10× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means to defend oneself or give an account of one's actions, and is used in the Bible to describe speaking in one's own defense, such as in Luke 21:14 and Acts 26:1.
Amplified meaning
with confidence, cheerfully, give an account of myself, apologize
Tyndale gloss
to defend oneself
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἀπολογέομαι is built from ἀπό (from) and λόγος (word). It means to defend oneself or to make a defense, often in a legal context. The New Testament uses it in passages like Luke 21:14 and Acts 26:1, where individuals are called to articulate their defense. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπολογέομαι, -οῦμαι

(< ἀπό, λόγος),

[in LXX: Je 12:1 (ויב) 38 (31):6, II Mac 13:26*;]

to defend: c. acc., Ro 2:15.

to defend one's self: absol., Lk 21:14, Ac 26:1; seq. ὅτι, Ac 25:8; τί, to adduce something in one's defence, Lk 12:11, Ac 26:24 (ταῦτα) 24:10 (τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ); περί, c. gen. rei, and ἐπί, c. gen. pers., Ac 26:2; c. dat. pers., Ac 19:33, II Co 12:19.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπολογέομαι, -οὔμαι ; impf. ἀπελογούμην (Acts xxvi. 1); 1 aor. ἀπελογησάμην; 1 aor. pass. inf. ἀπολογηθῆναι, in a reflex. sense (Lk. xxi. 14) ; a depon. mid. verb (fr. λόγος), prop. to speak so as to absolve (amd) one’s self, talk one’s self off of a charge ete. ; 1. to defend one’s self, make one’s defence: absol., Lk. xxi. 14; Acts xxvi. 1; foll. by ὅτι, Acts xxv. 8; τί, to bring forward something in defence of one’s self, Lk. xii. 11; Acts xxvi. 24, (often so in Grk. writ. also) ; τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπ. either I bring forward what contributes to my defence [Ὁ], or I plead my own cause [R. V. make my defence], Acts xxiv. 10; περί with | gen. of the thing and ἐπί with gen. of pers., concerning a thing before one’s tribunal, Acts xxvi. 2; with dat. of the person whom by my defence I strive to convince that Iam innocent or upright, to defend or justify myself in one’s eyes [A. V. unto]…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπολογέομαι. A good example of this judicial verb is afforded by P Par 3534 ff (a petition to King Ptolemy Philometor, B.C. 163) ἐάν σοι φαίνηται, συντάξαι καταστῆσαι ἐπί σε ὑπὲρ μὲν [ἐμοῦ ἀπολογιούμενον Δημήτριον ‘‘to make my defence” : cf. P Strass I. 51° (A.D. 262) ἀπολ]ογησομένους πρὸς τὰ [a Jel α[ἰ]ρόμενα αὑτοῖς and OG/S 609% (A.D. 231) μή τις ὡς ἀγνοήσας ἀπολογήσηται. Vettius Valens p. 2091 βασιλεῖ ἀπολογήσεται, καὶ ἐὰν μὴ ὑπὲρ ἑαυτοῦ, ὑπὲρ ἑτέρου δέ (cf. p. 2697°). Cf. fora cognate verb P Petr III. 53 (7)8 (iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski?, p. 45) πρὸς αἰτίαν, ὑπὲρ ἧς ἀπ]ολογίζεται, ‘to meet a charge against him, and make his defence” (Edd.), OGTIS 315% (B.C. 164-3) καὶ αὐτὸς ὑπὲρ ὧν ἔφησεν ἔχειν τὰς ἐντολὰς διὰ πλειόνων ἀπελογίσατο, P Leid A* (Ptol) ἀπολογίσωμαι (needlessly corrected to -ἥσωμαι by Leemans), α΄. See Hatzidakis #zz/. p. 395, ‘‘sagte man auch im Alterthum sowohl ἀπολογέομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπολογέομαι (apologeomai) — to defend oneself.

ἀπολογ-έομαι,

aorist ἀπελογησάμην[Refs 5th c.BC+]; also aorist passive ἀπελογήθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἀπολελόγημαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—speak in defence, defend oneself, opposed to κατηγορεῖν, περί τινος about a thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πρὸς τὴν μαρτυρίαν in reference or answer to the evidence, [Refs 5th c.BC+]before.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. ὑπέρ τινος speak in another's behalf, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. ὑπέρ τινος speak in support of a fact, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πρὸς Μέλητον in answer to him, [Refs 5th c.BC+]the defendant, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. with accusative of things, defend oneself against, ἀ. τὰς διαβολάς[Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πράξεις defend what one has done, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπολογέομαι

apologeomai

middle voice from a compound of 575 and 3056; to give an account

(legal plea) of oneself, i.e. exculpate (self):--answer (for self),

make defence, excuse (self), speak for self.

see GREEK for 575

see GREEK for 3056

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπολογέομαι

v.

I give a defense, defend myself

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπολογέομαι apologeomai 10x

to defend one’s self against a charge, to make a defence, Lk. 12:11; 21:14

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπολογέομαι ἀπό, λόγος to speak in defence, defend oneself, περί τινος about a thing, πρός τι or τινα in answer to.., Thuc., Plat.; ἀπ. ὑπέρ τινος to speak in another's behalf, Hdt.:—absol., id. Plat.; ὁ ἀπολογούμενος the defendant, Ar.

c. acc. criminis, to defend oneself against a thing, explain, excuse, Thuc., Aeschin.

ἀπ. τι ἔς τι to allege in one's defence against a charge, Thuc., Plat.

ἀπ. δίκην θανάτου to speak against sentence of death being passed on one, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNI-1S — Verb · present · no voice stated · indicative · first person · singular
present no voice stated indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNI-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ (An argument made before a court)

→ Of Jeremiah Jer 26:12-16

→ Of Peter Ac 4:8-13; 5:23-29

→ Of Stephen Ac 7

→ Of Paul Ac 22; 23:1-6; 24:10-21; 26:1-23

→ Military defenses

See FORT

→ See ARMIES

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%presenting a defense
presenting a defense40% · 4×present a defense30% · 3×i present a defense10% · 1×we are presenting a defense10% · 1×you may present a defense10% · 1×

10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb90%object10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
τίςIrg
Disj
προμελετάωI meditate beforehan
μήNeg
θέλωI will, wish, desire
χείρa hand
ἐμαυτοῦ
περί
ΠαῦλοςPaul
Article the
ἀπολογέομαιI present a defense;10×
what comes after →
Article the
δῆμοςthe people, multΦῆστοςFestus
Disj
τίςIrg
ὅτιthat, since, because
οὔτεNeg
κατέναντιopposite, in front o
θεόςGod, a god

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπολογέομαι · 10× in the New Testament
Acts Luke 2 Corinthians Romans
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAgainst Flaccus 106c. AD 40

τότε γὰρ κοινοὺς παρέχοντες ἑαυτοὺς δικαστάς, ἐξ ἴσου καὶ τῶν κατηγόρων καὶ τῶν ἀπολογουμένων ἀκροώμενοι, μηδενὸς ἀκρίτου προκαταγινώσκειν ἀξιοῦντες, ἐβράβευον οὔτε πρὸς ἔχθραν οὔτε πρὸς χάριν, ἀλλὰ πρὸς τὴν φύσιν τῆς ἀληθείας τὰ δόξαντα εἶναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.317c. AD 75–95

ταῦτα εἰπόντος Λαβάνου Ἰάκωβος ἀπελογεῖτο μὴ μόνῳ πατρίδος ἔρωτα τὸν θεόν, ἀλλὰ καὶ πᾶσιν ἐμφῦσαι, καὶ μετὰ τοσοῦτον χρόνον καλῶς ἔχειν αὐτὸν κατελθεῖν εἰς ταύτην.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Petr. 3 21 g (second copy)Krokodilopolis (Arsinoites)227 BC

Ἀθηναίου τῆς ἐπιγονῆς καὶ ἅμα τε γραπτὸν λόγον θεμένης καὶ τὰ δικαιώματα βουλομένης τε ἀπολογεῖσθαι τὴν δίκην ἐπειδὴ καὶ τὸ διάγραμμα ὃ καὶ παρέδοτο ἐν τοῖς δικαιώμασιν ἡ Ἡράκλεια

ου οὔτε ἐγγ … … μενούσης μου ἀπολογεῖσθαι … … … αγείνεται ὁ κατηγορῶν, ὁ δ’ οἰνο … … ἄπρατος γενέσθαι, αὐτὴ

PSI 7 827AD 301–AD 400

ζῶν ?. ἐὰν δὲ γράμματα αὐτοῦ ἐπιφέρῃς ἐναλλαγῆς ἢ ἄλλου τινὸς ἢ μεταβολῆς, πάντως ἀπολογούμεθα. καὶ νῦν οὖν μετάδος αὐτῷ αὐτὰ ταῦτα· περὶ γὰρ τούτου οὐδὲν δεδύνημαι πρᾶξαι ἐνθάδε,

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate